Upload
others
View
11
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Agilent 3070 / 79000 Board Test SystemsSite PreparationJune 2002
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1
Site Preparation – Legal Notices03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter � Notice, 1
� U.S. Government Restricted Rights, 1
� Radiated Immunity, 2
� Overvoltage Category, 2
� Pollution Degree for Agilent 3070 / 79000 Systems, 2
� Insulation Rating for Wires Connected to Agilent 3070 / 79000 Systems, 2
� Acoustic Level for Agilent 3070 / 79000 Systems, 2
� Acknowledgements, 2
� 3070 Series I DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 3
� 3070 Series II DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 4
� 3070 Series 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 5
� 79000 / xDSL DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014, 6
� Emergency Shutdown, 7
� Warranty, 8
� User Safety Symbols, 9
� Safety Symbols, 10
� Warnings, 11
NoticeThis manual is provided “as is” and is subject to change without notice.
AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Agilent shall not be liable for errors contained herein, nor for direct, indirect, general, special, incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
U.S. Government Restricted RightsThe Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial computer software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a), or as “Restricted computer software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the Agilent standard software agreement for the product involved.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2
:
Radiated ImmunityWhen subjected to high RFI fields (greater than 1 V/m), reduced performance may be experienced when making low-level analog measurements.
Overvoltage CategoryAC Power Overvoltage Category: CAT III
Pollution Degree for Agilent 3070 / 79000 SystemsPollution Degree 2
Insulation Rating for Wires Connected to Agilent 3070 / 79000 SystemsUse only external wiring with insulation rated for the maximum voltage (Vrms, Vpk or Vdc) and temperature to which the wire may be subjected in a fault condition.
Example: The system is connected to a source whose output is set for 50 Vrms. The source could be set for as high as 300 Vrms, intentionally or unintentionally. Therefore, the external wiring connected between this source and the system must be rated for 300 Vrms.
Acoustic Level for Agilent 3070 / 79000 SystemsLpA = 69dBam Arbeitsplatz (operator’s position)normaler Betrieb nach EN27779: 1991
AcknowledgementsThe XWD i/o and GIF output routines are derived from Jef Poskanzer’s PBMplus package:© Copyright by Jef Poskanzer 1989
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3
:
3070 Series I DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test DivisionManufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537Declares that the Product Name: 3070 (Series I) Board Test SystemsModel Numbers: 3070Product Options: AllConforms to the following Product Specifications:Safety: IEC 348:1978/HD 401 S1:1981
CSA 556BUL 1244Safety qualification performed August 1987
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class AIEC 801-2:1991/EN50082-1 (1992): 4kV CD, 8kV ADIEC 801-3:1984/EN50082-1 (1992): 3V/mIEC 801-4:1988/EN50082-1 (1992): 1kV Power Line, 0.5kV Signal Lines
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.Technical File Number: 97-0900-010-TCF Rev: A Dated: 25 February, 1997
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC and the protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC) and carries the "CE" mark accordingly.A Technical Report/Certificate was issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed Competent Body, namely,
Design to Distribution Limited Westfields House, West AvenueKidsgrove, Stoke-on-TrentStaffordshire, ST7 1TL United KingdomCertificate Number: D2D/EMC/CC/007/97 Dated: 10 March, 1997
March 25, 1997For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4
:
3070 Series II DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test DivisionManufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537Declares that the Product Name: 3070 Series II Board Test SystemsModel Numbers: 3070, 72, 73, 75, 79 and 3170, 72, 73, 75, 79 and 3272, 73, 75, 79Product Options: AllConforms to the following Product Specifications:Safety: IEC 1010-1 (1990) Incl. Amend 1 (1992)/EN61010-1 (1993)
CSA C22.2 #1010.1 (1992)UL 1244
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class AIEC 801-2:1991/EN50082-1 (1992): 4kV CD, 8kV ADIEC 801-3:1984/EN50082-1 (1992): 3V/mIEC 801-4:1988/EN50082-1 (1992): 1kV Power Line, 0.5kV Signal Lines
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.Technical File Number: 95-0900-001-TCF Rev: A Dated: 31 March, 1995
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC and the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC) and carries the "CE" mark accordingly.A Technical Report/Certificate has been issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed Competent Body, namely,
Interference Technology International Limited 41-42 Shrivenham Hundred Business ParkShrivenham, Swindon, Wilts. SN6 8TZEngland, UKCertificate Number: ITI/0084/UK Dated: 11 April, 1995
April 20, 1995For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5
:
3070 Series 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test DivisionManufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537Declares that the Product Name: 3070 Series 3 Board Test SystemsModel Numbers: 3070, 2, 3, 5, 9 and 3170, 2Product Options: AllConforms to the following Product Specifications:Safety: IEC 1010-1 (1990) Incl. Amend 1 (1992) + Amend 2 (1995)/EN61010-1 (1993) + A2 (1995)
CSA C22.2 #1010.1 (1992)UL 3111
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class AEN50082-1:1992IEC 1000-4-2:1995: 4kV CD, 8kV ADIEC 1000-4-3:1995: 3V/mIEC 1000-4-4:1995: 1kV Power Line, 0.5kV Signal Lines
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.Technical File Number: 97-0900-030-TCF Rev: A Dated: 12 February, 1998
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and with the requirements of the Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and with the protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and carries the "CE" mark accordingly. (Note: Compliance with the Machinery Directive requires equipment installation to be performed in accordance with the Agilent Application Note, "Compliance with the Machinery Directive requires specific installation procedure.") A Technical Report/Certificate has been issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed Competent Body, namely,
Celestica Limited Westfields House, West AvenueKidsgrove, Stoke-on-TrentStaffordshire, ST7 1TL United KingdomCertificate Number: TCR/98/023 Dated: 20 March, 1998
May 1, 1998For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6
:
79000 / xDSL DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014Manufacturer’s Name: Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Manufacturing Test DivisionManufacturer’s Address: 815 14th Street S.W.
Loveland, Colorado 80537Declares that the Product Name: 79000 Series Functional Test SystemsModel Numbers: E2195A, E2196A, E2190AProduct Options: AllConforms to the following Product Specifications:Safety: IEC 61010-1 (1990) + A2:1995/EN61010-1:1993 + A2:1995
CSA C22.2 #1010.1:1992UL 3111-1
EMC: CISPR 11:1990/EN55011 (1991): Group 1, Class AEN50082-1:1992IEC 61000-4-2:1995/: 4kV CDIEC 61000-4-3:1995/: 3V/mIEC 61000-4-4:1995/: 1kV Power Line
Attestation is provided according to article 10 (2) of the Directive by a Technical Contruction File.Technical File Number: 99-0900-001-TCF Rev: A Dated: 5 February, 1999
Supplementary Information: This product also herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and with the requirements of the Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC (inclusive 93/68/EEC), and with the protection requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and carries the "CE" mark accordingly. A Technical Report/Certificate was issued in accordance with Part V (Reg 50) of the UK Regulations (SI 1992 No. 2372) by a UK-appointed Competent Body, namely,
Celestica Limited Westfields House, West AvenueKidsgrove, Stoke-on-TrentStaffordshire, ST7 1TL United KingdomCertificate Number: CC/KID/009/99 Dated: 22 February, 1999
February 26, 1999For further information contact your local Agilent Sales and Service office.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7
:
Emergency Shutdown
The Emergency Shutdown Switch, (or Emergency Off, EMO) is the large red button located at the lower left corner on the front of the testhead. It turns off all ac and dc power to the testhead, and is equivalent to turning off the PDU on the rear of the pod. Press the Emergency Shutdown Switch if you need to power down the testhead and its associated equipment in an emergency.
DO NOT use the Emergency Shutdown Switch as a substitute for correct power-down (unboot) procedures i.e., executing the testhead power off command.
To restore power after pressing the Emergency Shutdown Switch, switch the PDU Off for 15 seconds and then On again.
Emergency ShutdownSwitch (EMO)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8
:
Warranty
Agilent 3070 / 79000 BOARD TEST SYSTEMS 1-YEAR 1. Agilent warrants Agilent hardware, accessories and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period of one year. If Agilent receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, Agilent will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
2. Agilent warrants that Agilent software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period of one year, due to defects in material or workmanship when properly installed and used. If Agilent receives notice of defects during the warranty period, Agilent will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
3. Agilent does not warrant that the operation of Agilent products will be uninterrupted or error free. If Agilent is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product to Agilent.
4. Agilent products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
5. The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by Agilent. If customer schedules or delays Agilent installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery.
6. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by Agilent, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d)
operation outside the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND AGILENT SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
8. Agilent will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of $300,000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim, and for damages for bodily injury or death, to the extent that all such damages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective Agilent Product.
9. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL AGILENT OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND: THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9
:
User Safety SymbolsThese symbols are used on labels on various places on the testhead.
WARNING — Do not operate the testhead if you can see this symbol. It means that hazards exist because the safety shroud is not installed. These hazards include pinched fingers from pulling down a test fixture and electrical shock if Agilent Performance Port is installed.
WARNING — Keep your hands away from the indicated areas of the testhead to avoid pinched fingers when rotating the testhead.
WARNING — Do not rotate the testhead past 65 degrees with a fixture installed, or the fixture could fall off the testhead, causing personal injury.
CAUTION - ESD — Devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge may be present. Follow approved ESD-safe handling practices while working with this equipment.
!
!55�
50�
65�
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10
:
Safety SymbolsThese symbols are used on labels on the product and in the documentation. They indicate that the user must
refer to the manual for specific information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product.
WARNING
✺Calls attention to a high-voltage hazard that could cause bodily injury or death.
WARNING
✸Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could cause bodily injury or death.
CAUTION
✸Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could cause damage to equipment or permanent loss of data.
NOTEContains important information.
Hazard (see WARNING and CAUTION below).
Laser product or laser subsystem.
Hazardous voltage.
Alternating current (ac).
Direct current (dc).
Mains ground terminal. Must be connected to earth ground before operating the equipment. Protects against electrical shock in case of fault.
Earth ground terminal.
Frame or chassis terminal.
!
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11
:
WarningsThe following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of this product. Agilent assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.
Ground the Equipment: For Safety Class I equipment (equipment having a protective earth terminal), an uninterruptable safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable.
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. For continued protection against fire, replace the line fuse(s) only with the fuse(s) of the same voltage and current rating and type. DO NOT use repaired fuses or short-circuited fuse holders.
Keep away from live circuits: Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields. Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service-trained personnel only. Under certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off. To avoid dangerous electrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so.
DO NOT operate damaged equipment: Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into
this product have been impaired, either through physical damage, excessive moisture, or any other reason, REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operation can be verified by service-trained personnel. If necessary, return the product to an Agilent Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Do not service or adjust alone: Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
Do not substitute parts or modify equipment: Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product. Return the product to an Agilent Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Ensure Rack Stability: To ensure stability of the test bay, place heavier instruments near the bottom of the rack.
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation i
Contents Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation03066-90114 Rev. Z 05/2002
Site Preparation – Legal Notices .....................................................................................................1
1 Site Preparation – ProcessThe Importance of Site Preparation ............................................................................................. 1-2
Site Prep Manual Description ................................................................................................ 1-2 Responsibilities ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
Agilent ’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 1-3Customer’s Responsibilities .................................................................................................. 1-3
The Site Preparation Process ....................................................................................................... 1-5The Site Prep Visit ................................................................................................................. 1-5Site Planning .......................................................................................................................... 1-5Site Plan Implementation....................................................................................................... 1-5Site Verification Visit ............................................................................................................ 1-5Receiving the System............................................................................................................. 1-5
Site Prep Checklist....................................................................................................................... 1-6
2 Site Preparation – System OverviewSystem Overview......................................................................................................................... 2-2
Testhead ................................................................................................................................. 2-9Controller ............................................................................................................................... 2-9Test Development Station / Center / Server .......................................................................... 2-9Support Bay ......................................................................................................................... 2-10xDSL / POTS Bay................................................................................................................ 2-10
3 Site Preparation – PlanningChoosing The Site........................................................................................................................ 3-2
System-Independent Criteria ................................................................................................. 3-2
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation ii
Table of Contents
System-Dependent Criteria.................................................................................................... 3-2The System Plan Drawing ........................................................................................................... 3-3
What To Draw ....................................................................................................................... 3-3Planning Aids......................................................................................................................... 3-3
Assigning Specialists ................................................................................................................... 3-8What Are Specialists?............................................................................................................ 3-8Site Coordinator ..................................................................................................................... 3-8System Administrator ............................................................................................................ 3-8Structural Specialist ............................................................................................................... 3-8Environmental Specialist ....................................................................................................... 3-8Electrical Specialist................................................................................................................ 3-9Vacuum Specialist ................................................................................................................. 3-9Compressed Air Specialist..................................................................................................... 3-9Communications Specialist.................................................................................................... 3-9
Scheduling Preparations ............................................................................................................ 3-10
4 Site Preparation – Structural RequirementsFloor Requirements...................................................................................................................... 4-2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4-2Anti-Static Surface................................................................................................................. 4-4Immobilization for the EFS Board Handler........................................................................... 4-5
Moving Access Requirements ..................................................................................................... 4-6Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4-6Dimensions of the Crated System.......................................................................................... 4-6Dimensions of the Uncrated System...................................................................................... 4-8Ramp Requirements............................................................................................................. 4-11Hallway and Door Width Requirements.............................................................................. 4-11
Storage Space Requirements ..................................................................................................... 4-12Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 4-12Backup Tape Storage ........................................................................................................... 4-12Documentation Storage........................................................................................................ 4-12
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation iii
Table of Contents
Fixture Storage..................................................................................................................... 4-13
5 Site Preparation – Environmental RequirementsIntroduction............................................................................................................................ 5-1
Air Quality Requirements ............................................................................................................ 5-2Introduction............................................................................................................................ 5-2Corrosive Contaminants ........................................................................................................ 5-2Particulate Contaminants ....................................................................................................... 5-2Viscid Contaminants.............................................................................................................. 5-2
Air Temperature Requirements ................................................................................................... 5-3Introduction............................................................................................................................ 5-3Air Temperature Specifications ............................................................................................. 5-3Cooling Requirements ........................................................................................................... 5-4
Humidity Requirements ............................................................................................................... 5-5
6 Site Preparation – Power RequirementsCustomer Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 6-1How to use this Chapter......................................................................................................... 6-1
Identifying Your System.............................................................................................................. 6-2About the PDU....................................................................................................................... 6-2
Power Requirements .................................................................................................................... 6-5Mains Disconnect .................................................................................................................. 6-5Power Drop ............................................................................................................................ 6-5Connecting Power to the PDU............................................................................................... 6-8
Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary? ................................................................................................... 6-11Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 6-11
PDU Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................................... 6-12327X 1-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................... 6-1579000 1-Module System AC Outlets................................................................................... 6-20317X 2-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................... 6-24
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation iv
Table of Contents
307X 4-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................... 6-28E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets ................................................................................ 6-35
Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options........................................................................... 6-41
7 Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum RequirementsIntroduction............................................................................................................................ 7-1
Compressed Air Requirements .................................................................................................... 7-2Compressed Air Specifications.............................................................................................. 7-2Connecting Air to the Testhead ............................................................................................. 7-2Air Quality ............................................................................................................................. 7-3
Vacuum Requirements................................................................................................................. 7-4Vacuum System ..................................................................................................................... 7-4Vacuum Recommendations ................................................................................................... 7-4Connecting Vacuum to the Testhead ..................................................................................... 7-5Vacuum Guidelines................................................................................................................ 7-9Vacuum Examples ................................................................................................................. 7-9Vacuum Control Assembly.................................................................................................. 7-17
Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer ........................................................................................ 7-19Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 7-19Compressed Air ................................................................................................................... 7-19Vacuum................................................................................................................................ 7-19
8 Site Preparation – Communications Cabling RequirementsLocal Area Network Requirements ............................................................................................. 8-2
Introduction............................................................................................................................ 8-2Agilent Local Area Network Plan ......................................................................................... 8-2Sample 3070 Series I Network Scheme................................................................................. 8-2Agilent 3070 Series II Networking........................................................................................ 8-5Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 Networking ........................................................................... 8-7
Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking................................ 8-10
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation v
Table of Contents
Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking ....................................... 8-13
9 Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving InstructionsInventory The Shipment .............................................................................................................. 9-2Uncrating The System ................................................................................................................. 9-3
Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series I System........................................................................... 9-3Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series II/3 and Agilent 79000 System........................................ 9-8Uncrating Procedure .............................................................................................................. 9-8Uncrating the Support Bay .................................................................................................. 9-12Tools Needed to Uncrate the Support Bay: ......................................................................... 9-12Uncrating Procedure: ........................................................................................................... 9-12
Placing The System ................................................................................................................... 9-15Moving the Testhead and Support Bay................................................................................ 9-15Immobilizing and Leveling the System ............................................................................... 9-15
Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System...................................................................................... 9-16Special Option to Part Number Listing................................................................................ 9-17
10 Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older SystemsIntroduction................................................................................................................................ 10-2Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001) ....................................... 10-5
Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers ....................................................................... 10-5Series 3 / 79000 Power Distribution .................................................................................... 10-9327X 1-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 10-1779000 - 1-Module System AC System .............................................................................. 10-28317X 2-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 10-39307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 10-50307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 10-60E2195/E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets................................................................... 10-67
Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000) ..................................... 10-78Introduction........................................................................................................................ 10-78
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation vi
Table of Contents
Series 3 / 79000 Power Requirements ............................................................................... 10-80Power Recommentations ................................................................................................... 10-82Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit Breakers................................................................... 10-89Connecting Power To The Testhead.................................................................................. 10-90“Mains” Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................... 10-101220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7) ................................... 10-102220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K).......................... 10-102120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWW, 05E) ....................................... 10-103120/208–127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWV, AWZ) ............................. 10-104200-240 3-phase Delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6) ................................................................ 10-105100/200-120/240 V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)............ 10-106220–240 V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J) ......................................................... 10-107200–240 V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)..................................... 10-108
Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II) ............................................................................... 10-109Identifying the PDU/PDK Type ...................................................................................... 10-109Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU........................................................................ 10-11244964A/B PDU Electrical Requirements ........................................................................ 10-113E1099A PDU Electrical Requirements............................................................................ 10-114E1170-80003 PDK Electrical Requirements ................................................................... 10-124E1131A PDU Electrical Requirements............................................................................ 10-125Agilent 3070 Series II / 3 - E1135A/B Power Distribution Units ................................... 10-128
Connecting Mains Power To The System ............................................................................. 10-143Introduction...................................................................................................................... 10-14344964A/B AC Mains Connection.................................................................................... 10-144E1099A AC Mains Connection ....................................................................................... 10-145Connecting Power to the E1170-80003 PDK .................................................................. 10-146Connecting Power to the E1131A PDU .......................................................................... 10-150Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDU....................................................................... 10-157
11 Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction ConversionIntroduction................................................................................................................................ 11-2
Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 11-2
© Agilent Techonolgies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation vii
Table of Contents
Who Should do the Current Reduction Conversion?........................................................... 11-3What to Do in Case of Difficulty......................................................................................... 11-3
Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure ................................................................... 11-4Current Reduction Conversion Preview .............................................................................. 11-4Schedule the Conversion ..................................................................................................... 11-5Determine the System Type and Power Option................................................................... 11-5Shut Down the System......................................................................................................... 11-8Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage........................................................................ 11-9Agilent 6621A and 6624A Line Voltage Settings ............................................................... 11-9Agilent 6634A Line Voltage Settings................................................................................ 11-156634B Line Voltage Settings ............................................................................................. 11-17Agilent 6642A Line Voltage Settings................................................................................ 11-18Rewire the Inputs to the Outlets ........................................................................................ 11-20327X 1-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 11-2979000 1-Module System AC Outlets................................................................................. 11-40317X 2-Module System AC Outlets .................................................................................. 11-51307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 11-62307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets...................................................................... 11-72E1085 POTS Bay and E2195 xDSL Bay AC Outlets ....................................................... 11-79Reconnect the Loads .......................................................................................................... 11-84Verify the System .............................................................................................................. 11-84Complete the Conversion................................................................................................... 11-84Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.......................................................................... 11-84
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-1
1111 Site Preparation – Process03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � The Importance of Site Preparation, 1-2
� Responsibilities, 1-3
� The Site Preparation Process, 1-5
� Site Prep Checklist, 1-6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-2
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: The Importance of Site Preparation
The Importance of Site Preparation
The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family of board test systems includes complex and sophisticated automatic test equipment. To ensure that your site is properly equipped for your new system, and to minimize the possibility of problems or delays in system installation, you must consider many things during site preparation. Before calling your local Agilent representative to install your system, read and follow the recommendations provided in this manual.
Site Prep Manual DescriptionThis manual contains the following chapters:
� Chapter 1, Site Preparation – Process (this chapter) discusses your responsibilities, lists Agilent ’s responsibilities, and provides a checklist to use as you proceed.
� Chapter 2, Site Preparation – System Overview describes the system at an overview level and defines terms you will encounter as you prepare your site.
� Chapter 3, Site Preparation – Planning discusses choosing a site for your system, designing your site layout, assigning people to do various preparation tasks, and scheduling your preparations.
� Chapter 4, Site Preparation – Structural Requirements describes floor, access, and storage requirements.
� Chapter 5, Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements describes air quality, temperature, humidity, and electromagnetic shielding requirements.
� Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements describes, for Series 3 systems, power requirements for the various parts of the system and mains power connections.
� Chapter 7, Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements describes the compressed air and vacuum that the system requires.
� Chapter 8, Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements describes the Local Area Network requirements.
� Chapter 9, Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions describes the uncrating, handling, and re-shipping process for a 327X / 79000 test system.
� Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems describes the power requirements for 3070 / 79000 systems using older power distribution units.
� Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion describes how to reconfigure the power subsystem of an Agilent 3070 Series 3 or 79000 which was shipped prior to June 1999 to have the same power requirements as 3070 / 79000 systems shipped after June 1999.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-3
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Responsibilities
Responsibilities Successful system preparation and installation requires planning and effort by both you and Agilent. Following are summaries of each party’s responsibilities.
Agilent ’s ResponsibilitiesAs a part of the purchase of an Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test system, Agilent will provide the following:
� SITE PREPARATION SUGGESTIONS To help you begin, an Agilent representative will visit you to help you understand what you will need to do to make your site ready for your system and answer any questions you may have. This is called the "Initial Site Preparation Visit" and the Agilent CEs will bill up to 2 hours to Agilent Technologies.
� ELECTRICAL and ENVIRONMENTAL INSPECTION After primary power has been installed at the site, an Agilent representative will inspect the lines to verify that your electrical power is suitable for the system. At the same time, the Agilent representative will inspect the site to verify that its environmental characteristics conform to the site preparation specifications. system and answer any questions you may have. This is called the "Verifying Site Preparation Visit" and the Agilent CEs will bill up to 2 hours to Agilent Technologies.
� INSTALLATION After all components of the system have been moved to the site, compressed
air and vacuum have been installed, and primary power has been run to the system location, an Agilent representative will complete the system installation. For systems with the power cord pre-installed, the CE will plug in the system after testing the power. For older systems where the power cord must be installed, the electrician will connect the power cord to the system after the CE removes the system from the pallet.
� Installation includes removing the system from the pallet, unpacking the smaller boxes, connecting cabling, starting the system, customizing the system software, and performing a complete system verification. system and answer any questions you may have. This is called the "Installation Visit" and the Agilent CE will bill up to 4 hours to Agilent Technologies.
� WARRANTY The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test systems include a one-year warranty that provides on-site hardware repair, software support and software updates.
� INSURANCE The system is insured by Agilent until it is delivered to your loading dock.
Customer’s ResponsibilitiesWhile you are primarily responsible for these activities, you can ask the Agilent representative for advice and information about services offered.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-4
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Responsibilities
� INSURANCE You must provide insurance coverage for your system from the time it is delivered to your facility.
� SOFTWARE SUPPORT CONTRACTS You are responsible for initiating and renewing support contracts for software, documentation updates, and telephone support. Software support and updates are included during the warranty period.
� SITE PREPARATION AND MAINTENANCE You must supply all labor and materials used in site construction and maintenance. You are also responsible for obtaining any building permits and licenses required by local laws and regulations.
� PROPER USE OF THE SYSTEM You are responsible for ensuring that use of the system is consistent with local laws and regulations.
� UNCRATING You should remove the tri-wall box from the testhead,1 but not remove the system from the pallet. The Agilent representative will remove the testhead from the pallet. You may inventory the shipment using the enclosed packing list. You may leave the smaller boxes for the Agilent representative to unpack when the system is installed.
� INSPECTION You must inspect the system for physical damage. If you believe that your system was damaged in shipment, call your Agilent representative.
� MOVING Moving the equipment from the receiving dock to the installation site is the customers responsibility. The system should be moved, after the tri-wall box is removed, to an area safe from damage or misplaced boxes.
� WIRING AND CABLING Wiring primary power to the system is your responsibility, as is installing communications cabling to the system. The actual power connection to the system will be made after the CE has removed the system from the pallet and moved it to the desired location.
1 It will be difficult to remove the tri-wall box in a room with less than 2.5 meters (8 foot) clearance.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-5
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: The Site Preparation Process
The Site Preparation Process
This section describes the steps of the Agilent 3070 / 79000 family system site preparation process.
The Site Prep VisitAn Agilent representative will come to your site to discuss what you will need to do to make your site ready for your system. During this visit, the Agilent representative will review this manual and answer any questions you may have. This will help you get started preparing your site.
Site PlanningThe site planning step is crucial! A little effort invested in understanding and planning your system will save much effort at installation time. Plan your system area using Chapter 3 of this manual. Use Chapters 2 through 9 to understand details as you plan. Assign “specialists.” Specialists are the people who will do various tasks. Make a “system plan drawing” that you and the Agilent representative can use to install your system. If you need help, call your Agilent representative. Schedule all site preparation activities.
Site Plan ImplementationImplement the plan. Use Chapters 4 through 11 and the system plan drawing. Work with your specialists.
Site Verification VisitThe site verification visit allows the Agilent representative to review your preparations and answer any remaining questions. The Agilent representative will check your power to verify that it is suitable for the system. The Agilent representative will also check your compressed air and vacuum hookups.
Receiving the SystemWhen the system arrives at your site, remove the tri-wall box from the testhead, but do not remove the system from the pallet. The Agilent representative will remove the testhead from the pallet. You may inventory the shipment using the enclosed packing list. You may leave the smaller boxes for the Agilent representative to unpack when the system is installed. You should move the system to the site where it will be installed, or a safe storage area.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-6
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Site Prep Checklist
Site Prep Checklist Use this checklist to check off each task as you complete it.
Table 1-1 Site preparation checklist
Task Checklist
Chapter 3, Site Preparation – Planning
[ ] Location chosen?Specialists assigned?
Site Coordinator:______________________________________________________
System Administrator:_________________________________________________Structural Specialist:___________________________________________________
Environmental Specialist:_______________________________________________Electrical Specialist:___________________________________________________
Vacuum Specialist:____________________________________________________Compressed Air Specialist:_____________________________________________
Communications Specialist:_____________________________________________[ ] Schedule Created:[ ] Board Handler Involvement (44990A EFS Board Handler Manual)
Chapter 4, Site Preparation – Structural Requirements
[ ] Floor suitable?[ ] Room to move the big box? If not, do your have a place to unpack it?[ ] Storage sufficient?
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-7
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Site Prep Checklist
Chapter 5, Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements
[ ] Air quality suitable?[ ] Ambient temperature suitable?[ ] Cooling sufficient?[ ] Humidity suitable?[ ] Electromagnetic environment suitable?
Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements
System Power
What power option is your system? Opt. ______[ ] AC mains power verified?
[ ] Mains disconnect1 installed if the system does not have an E1135C PDU?[ ] Do you need to install power conditioning equipment?
[ ] Do you need to install a new transformer?[ ] What system drop wire size is required? Wire Size ______
[ ] What system drop breaker size is required? Breaker Size ______[ ] Power cable installed for mains?
Connect Mains Power[ ] Power installed to system?
Convenience Outlet Power[ ] Testhead strip printer?
[ ] Testhead server?
Table 1-1 Site preparation checklist (continued)
Task Checklist
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 1-8
Chapter 1: Site Preparation – Process: Site Prep Checklist
Chapter 7, Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements
[ ] Compressed air line installed?[ ] Vacuum plan done?[ ] How many solenoids needed? _____[ ] Vacuum equipment installed?
Chapter 8, Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements
[ ] Local area network planned?[ ] LAN cabling installed?
NOTEThe remaining items go beyond site preparation, but must be completed before installation. See the System and Support Bay Uncrating Instructions (p/n’s E4000-90013 and E4000-90014 for a Series 3 system) attached to the ramp of the shipping pallet and Chapter 9, Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions for further information.
Chapter 9, Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions
[ ] Insurance coverage arranged for arrival?[ ] System inspected for physical damage?[ ] Shipment inventoried?[ ] Equipment moved to installation site?[ ] Testhead unpacked (Tri-wall box removed, but not removed from the pallet.). The Agilent service representative will unpack the smaller boxes and move the system as part of installation.
1. See Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements for more information.
Table 1-1 Site preparation checklist (continued)
Task Checklist
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-1
2222 Site Preparation – System Overview03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � System Overview, 2-2
This chapter presents information that will help you understand the parts of the 3070 Series I, II, 3 and 79000 families of board test systems. There are no tasks presented in this chapter.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-2
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
System Overview The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family systems must include a testhead and a controller. In addition, the 307X systems include a support bay and either type of system may include a POTS bay, a Quick Verify functional test bay, test development centers, test development stations, and peripherals. The testhead and support bay will require the greatest site preparation effort.
Figure 2-1 on page 2-3 shows a 307X Series I system with a control bay. It includes a 4-module (maximum) testhead and a support bay.
Figure 2-2 on page 2-4 shows a 317X Series I system. It includes a 2-module (maximum) testhead and no support bay or control bay.
Figure 2-3 on page 2-5 shows a 307X Series II system. It includes a 4-module (maximum) testhead with a support bay. The 317X Series II system (not shown) looks the same as the 307X Series II, but does not have a support bay. The 327X (not shown) is a physically smaller version of the 307X Series II, having only one module.
The main difference between the 3070 Series I and the 3070 Series II systems is the latter has twice the test pin capability, and in the Series II the controller is mounted in the testhead pod. The Series II systems also have redesigned testheads which include space for more equipment.
Figure 2-4 on page 2-6 shows a 3070 Series 3 system which uses an HP-UX controller.
The 3070 Series 3 systems are shorter in length than the Series II, has a choice of two faster HP-UX controllers, has new covers with new colors, uses a flat panel display and optionally have vacuum valves mounted in the testhead. The controller is moved to the right pod with the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) and the left pod is eliminated.
Figure 2-5 on page 2-7 shows a 3070PC Series 3 system. The right pod is slightly larger to make room for the Visualize P-Class PC which utilizes the Windows NT operating system.
Figure 2-6 on page 2-8 shows an Agilent 79000 Functional Test Systemis which is a one-module test system with an E1421A 6-slot VXI mainframe in the second module position. The DUT power supplies are moved to the pod on the left end of the cradle.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-3
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
Figure 2-1 307X Series I system
Support Bay
Testhead
Control Bay
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-4
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
Figure 2-2 317X Series I system
Testhead
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-5
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
Figure 2-3 3070 Series II systemL
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-6
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
Figure 2-4 3070 Series 3 system with HP-UX controller and an optional external support bay
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-7
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
Figure 2-5 3070PC Series 3 system using a Windows controller
pc-sys.wpg
88.4 mm (3.5 in)Wider Pod
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-8
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
Figure 2-6 79000 (E2190A) Functional Test System
Performance Ports
VXI Mainframe
3070 Module
79000d.wpg
Controller
DUT PowerSupplies
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-9
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
TestheadThe testhead connects to the device under test (DUT). The measurement hardware is installed in card cages called “modules.” A 307X system can have up to four modules. A 317X system can have up to two modules. A 327X has only one module. Vacuum and compressed air are both used to bring the DUT into contact with the measurement hardware: compressed air brings the fixture into contact with the interface pins in the module, and vacuum pulls the DUT down onto the fixture’s probes. One compressed air fitting and four vacuum ports are on a 307X testhead; one compressed air fitting and up to two vacuum ports are on a 317X, 79000 and 327X testhead.
The testhead cradle includes two integrated cabinets called the right pod and the left pod. The testhead’s power distribution unit (PDU) is located in the right pod. The testhead’s controller can be in either the right or left pod depending on where the monitor and keyboard are located (the controller must be in the pod closest to the monitor and keyboard).
ControllerThe controller for the 3070 Series I system is an HP 9000 Series-300. The controller for the 3070 Series II system is an HP 9000 Series-700. The controller for 3070 Series 3 and the 79000 is an HP 9000 Series-700; however the customer has a choice of two models with significantly different speed capability. They include peripherals and specialized software for board test. The controller for the Series 3 3070PC is a Visualize P-class using the NT 4.0 operating system.
Site preparation for the controller hardware is minimal and is identical to that of a general-purpose computer of the same type. Voltage and current requirements vary with location but must be considered during site preparation. Planning your LAN and routing LAN cabling is important for site preparation. In order to use remote support, you will need to provide a suitable telephone line.
Test Development Station / Center / ServerFor 3070 Series I systems, test development “stations” (TDSs) are diskless HP 9000 Series-300 controllers set up as cnodes on the testhead controller. Test development “centers” (TDCs) are also HP 9000 Series-300 controllers, but they are independent (not cnodes), having their own disks.
For 3070 Series II systems, “stations” are HP 9000 Series-700 (712-60, 712-100, or C110) controllers with disks. Most of the 3070 software is mounted using NFS. TDCs are no longer cluster servers, but still act as file servers for the TDS. TDSs are no longer cnodes; they are stand-alone systems, although they do have a lot of board test software that is NFS mounted. If a Series-II system is added to a site with Series I systems, the two systems can be networked to share resources.
For 3070 Series 3 and 79000 systems using the HP-UX controller, test development stations and centers have been replaced by test “servers.” Test servers are functionally similar to the older test development centers but are configured to be more capable of serving X-terminals and PC X-terminals. With the upgrade of
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 2-10
Chapter 2: Site Preparation – System Overview: System Overview
B.03.00 software, test development stations and centers were converted to servers.
For 3070PC series 3 systems using the Visualize PC Workstation, program development may be done on the standalone PC workstation and copied to the testhead controller. Windows NT is not a true multi-user operating system. There is no equivalent to "rlogin" or "Telnet" in Windows NT.
Support BayThe support bay is included with 307X systems. There is no support bay in 317X, 327X or 79000 systems.
In the Series I systems, the support bay contains the power distribution unit (PDU), module power supplies (MPUs), DUT power supplies, and optional test equipment. The PDU receives “mains” ac power and distributes ac power to the rest of the system. The MPUs supply dc power to the testhead modules. The DUT power supplies provide operating power to the device (board) under test. The support bay does not supply power to the control bay and peripherals. Mains power is wired to the support bay as part of the installation process.
In the 3070 Series II family system, the support bay is present in 307X systems but not in 317X systems. The support bay, when present, houses the DUT power supplies and optional test equipment. If the support bay is not present, this equipment is in the testhead.
In the Series 3 systems, the support bay contains only DUT power supplies and optional test equipment.
xDSL / POTS Bay1
The xDSL / POTS (x Digital Subscriber Line) / (Plain Old Telephone Services) Bay can be added to a 3X79 Series I, II, 3 system and to the 79000 system. The E2195A xDSL / POTS bay can be ordered with xDSL or POTS or both testing capability.
1 See the Telecom Theory and Repair Manual, 03066-90100, for more information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-1
3333 Site Preparation – Planning03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Choosing The Site, 3-2
� The System Plan Drawing, 3-3
� Assigning Specialists, 3-8
� Scheduling Preparations, 3-10
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-2
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Choosing The Site
Choosing The Site There are two types of criteria that you should consider when you choose the location of the 3070 / 79000 family system in your facility: criteria that are dependent on the system and criteria that are not.
System-Independent CriteriaSystem-independent criteria are ones that only you can determine. Examples are shop flow, department locations, plant security, etc. You will probably use these criteria to choose a prospective location and then qualify that location using the system-dependent criteria.
System-Dependent CriteriaSystem-dependent criteria come in two categories: those that are easily modified if needed and those that are not easily modified. The easy criteria will probably not disqualify a prospective location, but the difficult criteria might.
Easier criteria are storage space, ambient temperature, cooling, electrical power availability, vacuum supply, compressed air supply, and local area network cabling.
Difficult criteria are air quality, floor strength, ambient vibrations, and physical access. Use the information about difficult criteria described in this manual to qualify prospective locations.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-3
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing
The System Plan Drawing
What To DrawMany things need to be done before the 3070 / 79000 family board test system can be installed. If you make an area blueprint (a system plan drawing), you can use it to plan all aspects of site preparation. A complete drawing would detail power availability, communications cabling, compressed air and vacuum lines, and system placement with respect to other equipment. It can also serve to verify physical access.
Planning AidsUse Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-4 to lay out your system on the system plan drawing. Figure 3-1 on page 3-4 shows three layout suggestions for 3070 Series I system. Figure 3-2 on page 3-5 shows layout suggestions for a Series I 3X79 Telecom systems with xDLS/POTS (x Digital Subscriber Line)/(Plain Old Telephone Services) bays. Figure 3-3 on page 3-6 shows three layout suggestions for a 3070 Series II system. Figure 3-4 on page 3-7 shows three layout suggestions for a 3070 Series 3 system, including the 3070PC.
Before installing the 3070 / 79000 system you should determine whether the operator will stand or sit and whether the operator will work from the right or left side of the testhead (this is not as important with a 4-module testhead). These decisions will determine whether the monitor and keyboard should be on the right or left. If you want the monitor and keyboard to be in front of the testhead as shown, you should install them on the same
side of the testhead as the operator. However, if you want the monitor and keyboard to be above the testhead, you should install them on the opposite side from the operator. In any case, with the Series II, the controller must be installed in the testhead pod closest to the monitor and keyboard. It is important to make this decision correctly. If you decide to change it after installation, it will require some work to move the controller.
The figures show the systems with support bays. If your system does not have a support bay, or includes an optional extra equipment bay, modify your layout accordingly. See Chapter 4, Site Preparation – Structural Requirements for the exact dimensions of individual testheads and support bays.
Always allow 1 meter (3 feet) of space behind the system so service personnel can access the hardware inside the testhead and support bay.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-4
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing
Figure 3-1 Recommended Series I system layouts.
Left-to-Right Layoutwith Board Handler
Supp
ort
Bay
StripPrinterMonitor &
Keyboard
ControlBay
Testhead
11 ft.(3.4 m)
9 ft.(2.7 m)Conveyor
SupportBay
StripPrinterMonitor &
Keyboard
ControlBay
Testhead
12 ft.(3.7 m)
9 ft.(2.7 m)
SupportBay
StripPrinter Monitor &
Keyboard
ControlBay
Testhead
12 ft.(3.7 m)
9 ft.(2.7 m)
Right-to-Left Layout Left-to-Right Layout
SiteP6.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-5
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing
Figure 3-2 Recommended Series I 3X79 telecom system layouts
Left-to-Right Layout
ControlBay
Testhead
StripPrinter
Keyboard
12 ft.3.7 m
9 ft.2.7 m
xDSL/ POTS Bay
SupportBay
Testhead
StripPrinter Monitor &
Keyboard
ControlBay
9 ft.2.7 m
14 ft.4.3 m
xDSL/POTS
Right-to-Left Layout
sitepx.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-6
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing
Figure 3-3 Recommended 3070 Series II system layouts
Monitor &
SupportBay
Keyboard
Testhead
Strip Printer
Con
trolle
r3.7 m (12 ft.)
3 m (9 ft.)
Con
trolle
r
Testhead
Strip Printer
SupportBay
Monitor &Keyboard
3.7 m (12 ft.)
3 m (9 ft.)
SupportBay
Strip Printer
Con
trolle
r
Monitor &Keyboard
Board Handler ConveyorConveyor3 m (9 ft.)
3.7 m (12 ft.)
Right-to-Left Layout Left-to-Right Layout
with Board HandlerLeft-to-Right Layout 3070-S2.WPG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-7
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: The System Plan Drawing
Figure 3-4 Recommended 3070 Series 3 system layouts
Monitor &
SupportBay
Keyboard
Testhead
Strip Printer
Controller
3.3 m (11 ft.)
3 m (9 ft.)
Right-to-Left Layout
Testhead
Strip Printer
SupportBay
Monitor &Keyboard
3.3 m (11 ft.)
3 m (9 ft.)
Left-to-Right Layout
Controller
SupportBay
Con
trolle
r
Monitor &Keyboard
Board Handler ConveyorConveyor3 m (9 ft.)
3.3 m (11 ft.)
with Board HandlerLeft-to-Right Layout 3070-S3.WPG
Strip Printer
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-8
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Assigning Specialists
Assigning Specialists
What Are Specialists?The concept of "specialists" represents the recognition that, at most facilities, no one person will do all the preparatory work. Your specialists may simply plan and add to your system plan drawing, and then have the installation done by others. You may have several people share one "specialty," or you may have several specialists be the same person. Most importantly, each aspect of the planning should be the explicit responsibility of a specialist.
Site CoordinatorOne person should manage the site preparation process. In this manual, that person will be called the site coordinator.
Make sure someone has been designated as the site coordinator. The site coordinator will plan the installation, maintain the system plan drawing, and check off the site prep checklist. The site coordinator should probably assign all the other specialists.
System AdministratorAny successful system requires good system administration. One person should have responsibility of the system administration for your 3070 / 79000 family system.
The HP-UX System Administrator Manual is a good tool for your system administrator; it will arrive with the
system. Agilent also offers an excellent course in system administration for HP-UX based systems.
The Administering Agilent 3070PC Systems manual describes the NT system administration specific to 3070PC administration; it will arrive with the system. It does not describe general Windows NT system administration. For general information, refer to the Windows NT documentation.
Structural SpecialistThe structural specialist will verify that the floor is suitable for the system in terms of strength and anti-static properties. This specialist will examine the route from the receiving area to the system’s proposed location and decide how best to move the system to that place. Storage will be required after the system is in operation, and the structural specialist will decide what storage is needed. Chapter 4, Site Preparation – Structural Requirements is the primary reference for the structural specialist.
Environmental SpecialistThe environmental specialist will verify that your site’s environment is suitable for the system. Air quality, ambient temperature, cooling capacity, humidity, and electromagnetic interference are areas that the environmental specialist must address. Chapter 5, Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements contains information for this specialist.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-9
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Assigning Specialists
Electrical SpecialistYour electrical specialist will plan and install the mains power for the system, support bay and the convenience outlets for the other system equipment. These items should be marked on the system plan drawing. Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements contains the electrical information for Series 3 systems with the E1135C PDU and Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems for Series I, II, and Series 3 with the E1135B PDU
Vacuum SpecialistThe vacuum specialist will plan and install your system’s vacuum control system. Vacuum lines should be marked on the system plan drawing. The information pertaining to vacuum control is in Chapter 7, Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements of this manual.
Compressed Air SpecialistThe compressed air specialist will plan and install the compressed air supply for your system. Air lines should be marked on the system plan drawing. The compressed air information is in Chapter 7, Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements.
Communications SpecialistThe communications specialist will plan your local area network and install the LAN cables to your system. LAN cables and telephone lines should be marked on the system plan drawing. Chapter 8, Site Preparation –
Communications Cabling Requirements contains information for this specialist.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 3-10
Chapter 3: Site Preparation – Planning: Scheduling Preparations
Scheduling Preparations
When the system plan drawing has been made and the specialists know what to do, make a tentative schedule. Use the schedule to balance the work. With this plan, estimate when the site will be ready for the system.
Make sure that you schedule extra time; if any delays occur, you can use the extra time to finish preparations.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-1
4444 Site Preparation – Structural Requirements03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Floor Requirements, 4-2
� Moving Access Requirements, 4-6
� Storage Space Requirements, 4-12
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-2
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements
Floor Requirements This section contains:
� Introduction, 4-2
� Anti-Static Surface, 4-4
� Immobilization for the EFS Board Handler, 4-5
IntroductionThe Agilent 3070 / 79000 family system tester (testhead and Support Bay, if included) is the heaviest part of the system. The controller, test development centers, and test development stations present no special load-bearing concern. Table 4-1 shows the approximate weights of fully-loaded systems.
Table 4-1 System weights
System Type Product Weight
3070 Series I Testhead 370 kg (750 lb)
Support Bay 205 kg (450 lb)
Testhead and Support Bay on Pallet 725 kg (1600 lb)
307X Series I Testhead 454 kg (1000 lb)
Testhead on pallet 526 kg (1160 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 275 kg (600 lb)
Support Bay 209 kg (460 lb)
Support Bay on pallet 277 kg (610 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 185 kg (400 lb)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-3
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements
307X, 3070PC Series 3 Testhead 489 kg (1080 lb)
Testhead on pallet 587 kg (1295 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 275 kg (600 lb)
Support Bay 209 kg (460 lb)
Support Bay on pallet 277 kg (610 lb)
Maximum Point Floor Loading (each leg) 185 kg (400 lb)
317X Series I Testhead 410 kg (900 lb)
Testhead on pallet 480 kg (1060 lb)
317X Series II Testhead 454 kg (1000 lb)
Testhead on pallet 525 kg (1160 lb)
Maximum floor point loading each leg 275 kg (600 lb)
317X, 3070PC Series 3 Testhead 429 kg (945 lb)
Testhead on pallet 525 kg (1160 lb)
Maximum floor point loading each leg 275 kg (600 lb)
327X Series II Testhead 340 kg (750 lb)
Testhead on pallet 477 kg (1050 lb)
327X, 3070PC Series 3 Testhead 340 kg (750 lb)
Testhead on pallet 477 kg (1050 lb)
Table 4-1 System weights (continued)
System Type Product Weight
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-4
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements
Anti-Static SurfaceStatic electricity is destructive to your production process and to your board test system. Careless handling and poor planning can cost you yield and system reliability. The boards you will be testing are more easily damaged than the 3070 / 79000 board test system, but good anti-static planning will ensure high reliability from your system.
This is not an exhaustive description of anti-static precautions, but as a reminder as you plan your system area, here are some suggestions:
� Anti-static flooring. Plan to use an anti-static floor covering or mats.
� Grounding straps. Plan for foot straps in conjunction with anti-static flooring and wrist
3X79CTPOTS Bay off pallet
1-Channel 165 kg (365 lb)
4-Channel 170 kg (345 lb)
8-Channel 195 kg (430 kg)
307X Quick Verify 136 kg (300 lb)
Quick Verify on pallet 150 kg (330 lb)
Controllers 3070 - 300 Series Computer (in cabinet) 82 kg (180 lb)
3070 Series II - C110 Series Computer 15 kg (33 lb)
Controllers – 3070 Series 3 and 79000
B180L 14 kg (36 lb)
C240 20 kg (54 lb)
Visualize P-Class PC 11.3 kg (25 lb)
34595A or 44904A off pallet
Instrument rack 182 kg (400 lb)
44990A off pallet EFS Board Handler 95 kg (200 lb)
Table 4-1 System weights (continued)
System Type Product Weight
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-5
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Floor Requirements
straps for system operators. The testhead has external connectors for wrist straps.
� Anti-static DUT storage. Plan for anti-static tote bins for your devices-under-test and storage for anti-static bags.
� Anti-static hardware. Consider the use of any devices that will help you maintain a static-free environment. Examples are wrist strap testers and ion generators.
It is a good idea to take a look at your current static conditions before planning the installation of your system.
Immobilization for the EFS Board HandlerFor 3070 / 79000 family board test systems, it is normally sufficient to use the built-in leveling pads to stabilize the system. However, if the system includes the 44990A EFS Board Handler in an automated test cell, the integration specialist will need to bolt the testhead to the floor. Also if local building codes require equipment to be anchored to the floor due to potential seismic activity (earthquakes), you will need to bolt the system to the floor. The shipping brackets used to secure the system to the pallet are suitable for this purpose, but you will need to supply fasteners suitable for your situation.
A floor mount kit is sent with the 44990A EFS Board Handler. The kit is intended for mounting the testhead to a concrete floor. If you mount the system to a different type of floor, you can still use the brackets provided with the kit, but you will need to furnish bolts
or other fasteners. See the 44990A EFS Board Handler Manual, 44990-90004, for more detailed information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-6
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements
Moving Access Requirements
This section contains:
� Introduction, 4-6
� Dimensions of the Crated System, 4-6
� Dimensions of the Uncrated System, 4-8
� Ramp Requirements, 4-11
� Hallway and Door Width Requirements, 4-11
IntroductionThe Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test system is shipped from the factory on one large crate (on a pallet) and several smaller crates or boxes. The 307X Series I testhead includes the Support Bay on the same pallet.
The 307X Series II and Series 3 testhead does not include the Support Bay on the same pallet; the Support Bay is shipped on a separate pallet. The 317X and 317X Series II and Series 3 systems do not include a Support Bay. The large testhead crate may be too large to move to your system’s destination. If you cannot move it to its final destination, you will need to unpack the testhead and roll it on its casters (see Chapter 9). Other smaller boxes, containing the controller and test development hardware, should not present access problems.
Dimensions of the Crated SystemThe dimensions of the 3070 / 79000 family crated systems are shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Dimensions of the crated system
System Type Dimension Measurement
307X Series I Testhead (with Support Bay)
Length 2440 mm (96 in)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
317X Series I Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length 1740 mm (68.25 in)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-7
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements
3X7X Series II, Series 3 and 3070PC Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length 2095 mm (82.5 in)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
3X7X Series II, 3 Support Bay
Length 1120 mm (44 in)
Width 860 mm (31 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
327X Series II Quick Verify
Length 875 mm (25.6 in)
Width 625 mm (24 in)
Height 980 mm (38.6 in)
79000 Testhead Length 2095 mm (82.5 in)
Width 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Height 902 mm (33.5 in)
3X79 Series II POTS Bay Length 1120 mm (44 in)
Width 860 mm (34 in)
Height 1860 mm (73 in)
Table 4-2 Dimensions of the crated system (continued)
System Type Dimension Measurement
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-8
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements
Dimensions of the Uncrated SystemWhen removed from the crate (pallet), the system (testhead and Support Bay) can be rolled on its casters. This configuration is easier to move.
CAUTION
✸When moving a 307X testhead like this, you must move the testhead and Support Bay together, subject to the restraint imposed by the cabling between them. Be very careful not to damage system cables during moving!
Table 4-3 on page 4-8 describes the dimensions of the uncrated testhead and Support Bay. Chapter 9 describes moving the tester on its casters.
Table 4-3 Dimensions of the uncrated system
System Type Dimension Measurement
307X Series I Testhead (with Support Bay)
Length 2100 mm (83 in)
Width 1000 mm (40 in)
Height 1250 mm (49 in)
317X Series I Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length 1500 mm (59 in)
Width 870 mm (34 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
307X and 317X Series II Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length 1860 mm (73.5 in)
Width 820 mm (31 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-9
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements
327X Series II / 3 Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length 1150 mm (45 in)
Width 870 mm (34.2 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
327XPC Series 3 Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length (88.4 mm (3.5 in) longer than 327X) 1238 mm (48.5 in)
Width 870 mm (34.2 in)
Height 900 mm (35 in)
327X Series II Support Bay
Length 940 mm (37 in)
Width 600 mm (24 in)
Height 1320 mm (52 in)
327X Series II Quick Verify
Length 744 mm (29.3 in)
Width 600 mm (24 in)
Height 720 mm (28.3 in)
307X and 317X Series 3 Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length 1680 mm (66 in)
Width 790 mm (31 in)
Height 902 mm (35.5 in)
307XPC and 317X Series 3 Testhead (without Support Bay)
Length (88.4 mm (3.5 in) longer than 307X, 317X) 1765 mm (69.5 in)
Width 794 mm (31.3 in)
Height 907 mm (33.5 in)
Table 4-3 Dimensions of the uncrated system (continued)
System Type Dimension Measurement
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-10
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements
79000 Testhead Length 1410 mm (55.5 in)
Width 795 mm (31.3 in)
Height 902 mm (33.5 in)
3X79 POTS Bay Length 1080 mm (42.5 in)
Width 840 mm (33 in)
Height 1600 mm (63 in)
Table 4-3 Dimensions of the uncrated system (continued)
System Type Dimension Measurement
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-11
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Moving Access Requirements
Ramp RequirementsWhen moved on its casters, the testhead will negotiate ramps with inclines up to 8 percent before the leveling feet drag on the floor.
Hallway and Door Width RequirementsAs a rough guide, if you have room to move a 4-foot by 8-foot (1.25 m x 2.5 m) sheet of plywood, parallel to the floor, through hallways and doors, you will be able to move the crated testhead. If you cannot move the testhead crate all the way, you must remove it from its crate in a receiving area and push it on its casters to the destination.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-12
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Storage Space Requirements
Storage Space Requirements
This section contains:
� Introduction, 4-12
� Backup Tape Storage, 4-12
� Documentation Storage, 4-12
� Fixture Storage, 4-13
IntroductionSetting up your Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test system requires planning for storage. Obviously, you will need a handling and staging area for the boards you will be testing. Not so obviously, there are other things that you will need to store: backup tapes, system documentation, system fixtures, etc. If the system includes an 44990A EFS Board Handler, you will need to provide a place to store the cart that comes with the board handler. See the E44990A EFS Board Handler Manual, 44990-90004, for information on EFS storage dimensions.
Backup Tape StorageThe 3070 / 79000 family systems are reliable, but no system is safe against data loss due to system disk or computer failure. Always run system backups at regular intervals. Before the system is installed, plan for backup tape storage in the system area. To be safer still, always place a recent backup in a different area or building.
Documentation StorageYou will use system documentation often in the life of your 3070 / 79000 family system. Plan book shelf storage for the documentation near the system, where your people will be using it. Four of the system documents that you will need are:
� HP-UX manuals — These manuals discuss system administration and general HP-UX tasks. Plan for 30 centimeters (12 inches) of shelf space.
� Windows NT manuals - These manuals discuss system adminstration and general NT tasks. Plan for approximately 25 centimeters (10 inches) of shelf space.
� Agilent 3070 / 79000 Family System Support Log — The 3070 / 79000 Family System Support Log will contain the business cards of Agilent representatives, system license information, and any system repair history that your service representative chooses to archive. It is your reference to customer-performed preventive maintenance. Keep it close to the testhead for easy access by your system manager and the Agilent representatives. Plan for one binder 5 centimeters (2 inches) wide.
� Beginning with software revision B.02.75, 3070 / 79000 Family User manuals are only available online on the 3070 system, and on CD-ROM. They are not available printed, therefore no storage space is needed.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 4-13
Chapter 4: Site Preparation – Structural Requirements: Storage Space Requirements
Fixture StorageYou will have a significant investment in your system fixtures. They are precision machines and must be kept clean and undamaged. Plan safe and dust-free storage near the testhead for your fixtures.
You will receive a Pin Verification Fixture with the first testhead at your site to use to test the fixture interface pins of your systems. Be sure to keep the Pin Verification Fixture in your fixture storage area.
The following items are a collection of do’s and don’t’s with respect to fixture storage:
Don’t store fixtures on painted shelves. The bottom of the fixture will scrape small particles of paint off the shelf which will fall into and contaminate the testhead’s interface pins.
If possible, cover your fixtures when not in use, especially when the air contains a high level of particulates.
Don’t store fixtures on paper-, cardboard-, or carpet-covered surfaces. These materials could contain corrosive substances that would react with the fixture’s gold-plated personality pins.
Don’t store fixtures on wooden shelves. Wood splinters can be carried on the bottom of the fixture to the testhead, thereby contaminating testhead interface pins.
Don’t stack fixtures on top of one another.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-1
5555 Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Air Quality Requirements, 5-2
� Air Temperature Requirements, 5-3
� Humidity Requirements, 5-5
IntroductionThe Agilent 3070 / 79000 family systems can operate in a wide range of environmental conditions, but do require some minimum site management for continued optimum use. This chapter provides site environment requirements for reliable use of 3070 / 79000 family systems, including air quality, air temperature, and humidity.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-2
Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Air Quality Requirements
Air Quality Requirements
This section contains:
� Introduction, 5-2
� Corrosive Contaminants, 5-2
� Particulate Contaminants, 5-2
� Viscid Contaminants, 5-2
IntroductionAs a rule, good air quality is as important for the reliability of your 3070 / 79000 family system as it is for your production process. Three types of airborne contaminants are discussed below. The presence of any of these contaminants at the site will contribute to system degradation, resulting in lower reliability and higher operating costs.
Corrosive ContaminantsCorrosion is a complex form of material deterioration or destruction by chemical or electrochemical reaction. The presence of corrosive contaminants (gases) in the atmosphere is very common in industrial environments. If ignored, corrosion can eventually degrade system performance by its effects on high impedance circuits and low impedance interfaces. It can also deteriorate most plastics including software storage media. The effects of corrosive contaminants are usually accelerated at high humidities or high temperatures.
Corrosives generally cannot be filtered out of the air by normal filtration methods, and the techniques that must
be used for their removal are complex and costly. If the source of corrosive contaminants cannot be eliminated, the system should be installed in an enclosed environment with a fresh air supply at positive pressure.
Particulate ContaminantsParticulate contaminants (hard particles) consist of smoke, dust, hair, lint, fibers and miscellaneous organic and inorganic materials. The presence of these contaminants in the air can cause system degradation, especially where disk drives, test fixtures, and low impedance interfaces are concerned. Particulate contaminants can be filtered from the air, and appropriate filters should be included with any air conditioning installation. Also consider installing "No Smoking" signs in the area. Tobacco smoke is a well-known factor in fixture contact contamination. It causes false failures leading to unnecessary DUT repairs and higher production costs.
Viscid ContaminantsViscid contaminants are oily or sticky airborne substances that can be deposited on the system’s electronic and mechanical parts. Besides contributing directly to system degradation, viscid contaminants collect and hold particulate contaminants and make cleaning very difficult. Viscid contaminants can be removed from the air by filtration, but the elimination of their source, if possible, is preferable.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-3
Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Air Temperature Requirements
Air Temperature Requirements
This section coontains:
� Introduction, 5-3
� Air Temperature Specifications, 5-3
� Cooling Requirements, 5-4
IntroductionThis section provides the temperature and cooling requirements for the 3070 / 79000 family systems. The requirements are summarized in Table 5-1, and discussed in detail in the remainder of this chapter.
Air Temperature SpecificationsThe 3070 / 79000 family board test system is designed to operate uninterrupted in an area where the air temperature is stable and in the range from 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F), as measured at the tester-to-fixture interface.
The system has a built-in temperature sensor inside the testhead, located on the ASRU card. This sensor constantly monitors the temperature of the air that has been drawn through the testhead after it cools the
system components. If the temperature sensor finds that the air temperature inside the testhead has changed ±5 C (±9 F) since the last time the system ran AutoAdjust All, it will again run AutoAdjust All. Therefore, to ensure uninterrupted use, it is important that the ambient room temperature remain reasonably stable.
Table 5-1 Temperature and humidity ranges for operation and storage
Operating Temperature (measured at tester-to-fixture interface)
Operating Humidity Storage Temperature
Testhead 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) 5 to 80 percent non-condensing -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
Support Bay 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F) 5 to 80 percent non-condensing -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
UX Controller 5 C to 40 C (41 F to 104 F) 20 to 80 percent non-condensing
-40 C to 65 C (-40 F to 149 F)
PC Controller 5 C to 40 C (41 F to 104 F) 15 to 80 percent non-condensing
-40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-4
Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Air Temperature Requirements
NOTEThe air temperature inside the system is not considered stable until the system has been powered for at least 30 minutes.
If the sensor finds that the air temperature inside the system is too high, the system will shut down; typically, the over-temperature shutdown point is 55 C (131 F). See Cooling Requirements on page 5-4 for information
on air conditioning requirements. See Table 5-1 on page 5-3 for more temperature and humidity specifications.
Cooling RequirementsDesign the site cooling capability using the heat dissipation estimates in Table 5-2. The numbers are for testheads with fully loaded modules, Serial Test power supplies, and fully loaded support bays.
Table 5-2 System heat dissipation
Number of Modules Dissipation
3X7X Series I Testhead (with Support Bay)
1 Module 5100 BTU (1.5 kW)
2 Modules 8500 BTU (2.5 kW)
3 Modules 11900 BTU (3.5 kW)
4 Modules 15300 BTU (4.5 kW)
3X7X Series II, Series 3, including 3070PC, Testhead (with Support Bay)
1 Module 10500 BTU (3.1 kW)
2 Modules 19700 BTU (5.8 kW)
3 Modules 28500 BTU (8.4 kW)
4 Modules 3700 BTU (10.9 kW)
327X / 79000 1 Module 10500 BTU (2.5 kW)
3X79CT POTS Bay 8 Channels 8500 BTU (2.5 kW)
44900A EFS Board Handler 1000 BTU (0.3 kW)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 5-5
Chapter 5: Site Preparation – Environmental Requirements: Humidity Requirements
Humidity Requirements
The 3070 / 79000 family board test system is designed to operate in the range from 5 percent to 80 percent relative humidity (non-condensing).
If the system is subjected to condensation, as if moved from a cold loading dock into a warm (and damper) environment, allow at least 24 hours for the system to recover before powering up.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-1
6666 Site Preparation – Power Requirements03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Customer Responsibilities, 6-1
� How to use this Chapter, 6-1
� Identifying Your System, 6-2
� Power Requirements, 6-5
� Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary?, 6-11
� PDU Wiring Diagrams, 6-12
� Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options, 6-41
Customer ResponsibilitiesIt is the customer’s responsibility to (a) prepare the site with adequate ac power for the system, and (b) connect the system to the ac power source. These are not Agilent’s responsibilities.
CAUTION
✸After connecting power to the system, do not power up the system. An Agilent service representative will verify the power and complete the system installation and verification.
How to use this Chapter1 Read Identifying Your System on page 6-2. You
must know what type of system you have and where the system’s PDU (there may two) is located to prepare your site.
2 Read Power Requirements on page 6-5. In most cases this section will describe all you need to do to prepare your site.
3 If you are connecting the system to a different power configuration than it is wired for, read Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary? on page 6-11.
To read about changes to 3070 / 79000 PDUs, MPUs (module power units) and power options over time, see Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options on page 6-41.
NOTEBeginning in May 2001, only three power options are available for the 3070 / 79000 / E2197A systems:3PD — 200–240 V 3-phase Delta3PY — 208–220 V 3-phase Wye3PN — 380–415 V 3-phase Wye with neutral
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-2
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Identifying Your System
Identifying Your System
The testhead product number and serial number are located on the rear of the testhead cradle.
If you are uncertain whether your 3070 system is a Series I, Series II, Series 3, or 79000:
� The Series I system does not have a "Series" logo, and does not have pods (integrated cabinets) on the sides of the testhead.
� The Series II system has the "Series II" logo on the front of the testhead, and it has wide pods on both sides of the testhead.
� The Series 3 system has the "Series 3" logo on the front of the testhead, and it has a wide pod only on the right side of the testhead.
� The 79000 system has the "79000" logo on the top of the testhead, and it has the wide pods on both sides of the testhead.
Figure 6-1 on page 6-3 shows rear views of the 3070 Series I and Series II systems.
Figure 6-2 on page 6-4 shows rear views of the 3070 Series 3 and 79000 systems.
NOTEAn older systems may have been upgraded to replace a PDU which was no longer available or for current reduction as described in Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion. If so, you will have to manually compare the system wiring with the diagrams in the appendices to determine the existing wiring configuration.
About the PDUThroughout this chapter you will see references to a PDU (power distribution unit). The PDU is the device in the system to which you will connect ac power.
The PDU is wired differently for different power configurations. The voltage of the PDU is marked on the front panel of the PDU. If you install a system in a location in which the actual power does not match the power configuration of the PDU, you may need to rewire the outlet connections in the PDU (see Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary? on page 6-11.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-3
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Identifying Your System
Figure 6-1 Rear views of 3070 Series I and Series II systems
317X Series II Testhead
E1135A or E1135B PDU
317X Series I Testhead
307X Series II Testhead with Support Bay
307X Series I Testhead with Support Bay
SYS_ID.WPG
E1170-80003 PDK
PDU #1 (Main): E1135A orE1135B
PDU #2 (Branch): E1135A or E1135B
E1135A or E1135B PDU (Main) E1135A or E1135B PDU (Branch)
View with reardoor open
Port3
Port2
In0ut
E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)
327X Series II Testhead
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-4
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Identifying Your System
Figure 6-2 Rear views of 3070 Series 3 and 79000 systems
307X Series 3 Testhead with Support Bay
SYS_ID2.WPG
E1135B/C PDU (Main)
E1135B/C PDU (Main) E1135B/C PDU (Branch)(Single-phase options w/phase voltageless than 250 volts)
View with reardoor open
317X Series 3 Testhead
Port1Port0 Port2
Port3
In0ut
Port1Port0
Port3
Port2
In0ut
Port2Port3
E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)
79000 Testhead
MainsDisconnect
MainsDisconnect Mains
Disconnect
Port3
Port2
In0ut
E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)
327X Series 3 Testhead
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-5
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements
Power Requirements
This section contains:
� Mains Disconnect, 6-5
� Power Drop, 6-5
� Connecting Power to the PDU, 6-8
Mains DisconnectA mains disconnect — providing over-current and short-circuit protection — should be provided for the system. It may be a fused switch or a circuit breaker (see Figure 6-3 on page 6-6).
If a fused switch is used, it must:
� Be rated for 30 amps in each phase.
� Open all line conductors and neutral conductors where local code applies, but not the protective earth conductor.
� Be marked "Mains Disconnect" or the equivalent in your local language.
� Be marked with a "|" for the "On" position or "O" for the "Off" position.
� Be capable of being locked in the "Off" position, but not in the "On" position.
� Be installed as close to the system as possible, where it can be easily reached by the system operator.
If a circuit breaker is used, it must meet all of the above requirements plus:
� Be rated for a minimum of 10,000 amps interrupting capacity (AIC) if used on a 200–240 volt circuit, or 14,000 AIC if used on a higher voltage circuit.
Power Drop� A separate power drop should be provided for the
testhead due to its high current requirements.
� Separate power drops should be provided for xDSL and POTS bays.
� Copper wire should be used for the power drop.
� An electrician must determine the wire size for the power drop. The wires must be sized to ensure that the voltage at the system does not drop below 90 percent of nominal (see Calculating the Minimum Voltage on page 6-6).
� Convenience outlets should be provided near the system for external equipment such as programming stations, extra equipment bays, and automation equipment. Locate the outlets within one meter (three feet) of the device. See Chapter 3 to plan the location of convenience outlets. Convenience outlets should supply 20 amps at 100–120 volts or 10 amps at 200–240 volts.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-6
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements
Calculating the Minimum VoltageThe voltage at the testhead must be at least 90 percent of nominal. To calculate the minimum rms voltage multiply the rms voltage by 0.9. To calculate the minimum peak voltage, multiply the rms voltage by 0.9 and then 1.414. For example:
208 volts rms * 0.9 = 187 volts rms208 volts rms * 0.9 * 1.414 = 265 volts peak
See Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers below.
Figure 6-3 Wiring diagram
Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit BreakersTable 6-1 on page 6-7 shows the full-load amps (FLA) for each system type. FLA was calculated as follows:
� For the 3X7X: a fully-loaded system with 3 STC cards in every module.
� For the 79000: a fully-loaded system with 6 STC cards in the module.
3070 / 79000 System
CircuitBreakeror Fuses
Pigtail+.wpg
PDU
AC voltage source
Power receptacle andpower cord from the PDU
Electricianmust determinethe conductor size
Customer-installed powerdrop and receptacle
MainsDisconnect
Voltage measured at the powerreceptacle or PDU, with thesystem on, must be +6%, -10% of nominal.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-7
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements
Table 6-1 Series 3 and 79000 power requirements
PDU Power Option
Voltageline-to-neut / line-to-line Full-Load Amps (FLA) for:
327X 79000 317X 307X xDSL/POTS Bay
200–240V 3-Phase Delta 3PD
200220230240
13131313
14141414
18181818
24242424
12121212
208–220V 3-Phase Wyel 3PY
120 / 208127 / 220
1313
1414
1818
2424
1212
380–415V 3-Phase Wye w/Neutral 3PN
220 / 380230 / 400240 / 415
999
101010
101010
161616
101010
L1
L3 L2
G
L1
L3L2G
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-8
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements
Connecting Power to the PDUBeginning with the serial numbers shown in Table 6-2, all systems are shipped with SO1 power cords and plugs factory-wired to the PDU.
One of two different power cords and plugs are attached to the PDU depending on the country where the system will be installed:
� International — E1135-61610: uses 5x6 mm2 5-conductor cord with a IEC 60309 plug and mating receptacle (see Figure 6-4 on page 6-9).
� North America — E1135-61611: uses #10 AWG 5-conductor cord with NEMA plug that mates with NEMA L21-30 (see Figure 6-5 on page 6-10). The female receptacle is available locally.
1 Service with Oil resistant jacket
Table 6-2 Beginning serial numbers of systems shipped with power cords
System Type Testhead Product
Testhead Serial
307X E9900A US38240533
317X E9998A US38240410
327X E9997A US38240248
79000 E2190A US38050137
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-9
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements
Figure 6-4 3070 Series 3 - International 3-phase systems
3070 / 79000 System
PowerReceptacle
30A / 3-PhBreaker or3-30A Fuses
SO-Plug-International.wpg
PDU
2.5 m (8.2 ft) of 5x6mm2 SO cord, cord and male receptacle supplied by Agilent (E1135-61610)
Power cord withfemale receptacle
supplied by Agilent
Conductors andservice sized inaccordance withlocal codes
Site ac voltage source
Voltage measured at the powerreceptacle or PDU, with thesystem on, should be +6%, - 10% of nominal.
Any problems should bereported to the local electricianfor corrective action.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-10
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Power Requirements
Figure 6-5 3070 Series 3 - North American 3-phase systems
3070 / 79000 System
SO-Plug-NorthAmerica.wpg
PDU
2.5 m (8.2 ft) of #10 AWG 5 conductor SO Cord,cord and male receptacle supplied by Agilent(E1135-61611)
Power cord withfemale receptaclesupplied by the
customer
30A / 3-PhBreaker or3-30A Fuses
Conductors andservice sized inaccordance withlocal codes
Site ac voltage source
PowerReceptacle
Voltage measured at the powerreceptacle or PDU, with thesystem on, should be +6%, - 10% of nominal.
Any problems should bereported to the local electricianfor corrective action.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-11
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary?
Is PDU Re-wiring Necessary?
IntroductionRe-wiring the PDU is necessary only if you are connecting it to a different power configuration than it was wired for — not merely a different voltage, but a different configuration (see Table 6-3). See the examples below.
Suppose your system’s PDU is wired for 220 volts wye (option 3PY) and you want to connect it to:
1 208 volts wye (option 3PY)
No re-wiring is necessary; this is merely a voltage change and all internal components will handle 200 to 240 volts.
2 220 volts delta (option 3PD)
No re-wiring is necessary; options 3PY and 3PD have the same internal wiring.
3 220 volts wye with neutral (opt 3PN)
Re-wiring is necessary because the internal circuits are wired phase-to-neutral and the internal components would be under-powered. Whenever you
switch from a non-neutral to a neutral configuration, or vice versa, you must re-wire the PDU.
If you determine that re-wiring the PDU is necessary, go to PDU Wiring Diagrams on page 6-12.
Table 6-3 Power Options / Configurations
Power Options
Configuration Description1
1. Regardless of the power option, the internal system compo-nents always operates at 200–240 volts.
3PD 200–240 volts 3-phase DeltaIncludes 200V, 220V, 230V, 240V
3PY 208–220 volts 3-phase WyeIncludes 208V, 220V
3PN 380–415 volts 3-phase Wye with NeutralIncludes 380V, 400V, 415V
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-12
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
PDU Wiring Diagrams
Table 6-4 on page 6-13 directs you where to find wiring diagrams in this chapter for 3070 Series 3 and 79000 testheads and E2197A xDSL / POTS bays.
If you have a Series I or Series II system, refer to Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems.
NOTEBeginning in November 2000, only 3-phase power options are available for 3070, 79000 and E2197A products.
NOTEBeginning in May 2001, the PDU includes 20-centimeter-long (8-inch) power cords with female plugs hard-wired to the output terminal block. This means that the testhead outlet boxes can be unplugged rather than un-wired from the terminal block, making PDU replacement much easier. The following figures do not show this plug connection between the terminal block and the outlet boxes.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-13
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Table 6-4 3070 Series 3 / 79000 PDU wiring diagram
PDU Power Option
Voltage line-to-neut / line-to-line
Testheads xDSL/POTS Bay
327X Outlet LocationsFigure 6-6 on page 6-15
79000 Outlet LocationsFigure 6-11 on page 6-20
317X Outlet LocationsFigure 6-16 on page 6-24
307X Outlet LocationsFigure 6-21 on page 6-28
Outlet locationsFigure 6-28 on page 6-36
200–240V 3-phase Delta 3PD 200 Figure 6-7 on page 6-16
Figure 6-12 on page 6-21
Figure 6-17 on page 6-25
Figure 6-22 on page 6-29, Figure 6-24 on page 6-31
Figure 6-29 on page 6-37
220 Figure 6-7 on page 6-16
Figure 6-12 on page 6-21
Figure 6-17 on page 6-25
Figure 6-22 on page 6-29, Figure 6-24 on page 6-31
Figure 6-29 on page 6-37
230 Figure 6-7 on page 6-16
Figure 6-12 on page 6-21
Figure 6-17 on page 6-25
Figure 6-22 on page 6-29, Figure 6-24 on page 6-31
Figure 6-29 on page 6-37
240 Figure 6-7 on page 6-16
Figure 6-12 on page 6-21
Figure 6-17 on page 6-25
Figure 6-22 on page 6-29, Figure 6-24 on page 6-31
Figure 6-29 on page 6-37
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-14
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
208–220V 3-Phase Wye 3PY 120 / 208 Figure 6-7 on page 6-16
Figure 6-12 on page 6-21
Figure 6-17 on page 6-25
Figure 6-22 on page 6-29, Figure 6-24 on page 6-31
Figure 6-29 on page 6-37
127 / 220 Figure 6-7 on page 6-16
Figure 6-12 on page 6-21
Figure 6-17 on page 6-25
Figure 6-22 on page 6-29, Figure 6-24 on page 6-31
Figure 6-29 on page 6-37
380–415V 3-Phase Wye w/Neutral 3PN 220 / 380 Figure 6-9 on page 6-18
Figure 6-14 on page 6-23
Figure 6-19 on page 6-27
Figure 6-25 on page 6-32,Figure 6-27 on page 6-34
Figure 6-31 on page 6-39
230 / 400 Figure 6-9 on page 6-18
Figure 6-14 on page 6-23
Figure 6-19 on page 6-27
Figure 6-25 on page 6-32, Figure 6-27 on page 6-34
Figure 6-31 on page 6-39
240 / 415 Figure 6-9 on page 6-18
Figure 6-14 on page 6-23
Figure 6-19 on page 6-27
Figure 6-25 on page 6-32, Figure 6-27 on page 6-34
Figure 6-31 on page 6-39
Table 6-4 3070 Series 3 / 79000 PDU wiring diagram
PDU Power Option
Voltage line-to-neut / line-to-line
Testheads xDSL/POTS Bay
L1
L3L2G
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-15
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 6-6 327X 1-module system
Outlet 2
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 3
Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-16
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-7 327X Options 3PY, 3PD
32-111.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-17
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-8 327X Options 3PY, 3PD
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-18
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-9 327X Option 3PN
32-111n.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-19
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-10 327X Option 3PN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-20
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
79000 1-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 6-11 79000 1-module system
Outlet 2
Testhead (Rear View) E2190_ol.wpg
Outlet 1
Outlet 3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-21
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-12 79000 Options 3PY, 3PD
79-111.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-22
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-13 79000 Options 3PY, 3PD
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-23
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-14 79000 Option 3PN
79-111n.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-24
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-15 79000 Option 3PN
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 6-16 317X 2-module system
Outlet 0
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-25
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-17 317X Options 3PY, 3PD
31-111.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-26
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-18 317X Options 3PY, 3PD
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-27
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-19 317X Option 3PN
31-111n.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-28
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-20 317X Option 3PN
307X 4-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 6-21 307X 4-module system
Outlet 0
Support Bay(Rear View)
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-29
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-22 3070 Options 3PY, 3PD
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
30-111-1.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-30
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-23 3070 Options 3PY, 3PD
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-31
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-24 3070 Options 3PY, 3PD (support bay)
30-111-2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-32
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-25 3070 Option 3PN
30-111n-1.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-33
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-26 3070 Option 3PN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-34
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-27 3070 Option 3PN (support bay)
30-111n-2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-35
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC OutletsThe instruments in the xDSL/POTS bay, except the Kikusui power supply, are plugged into the E1135C PDU.
With the E2197A xDSL/POTS bay the 6811B ringer supply is plugged into the E1135C PDU and the isolation transformer is removed.
See the Telecom Theory and Repair Manual, Chapter 4, for additional information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-36
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-28 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay (shown with POTS options)
POTS-3ph.WPG
Outlet 1 -
LineFilter
PDU
MainsInput
5678
To Gnd
1234
To Gnd
See Table
See Table
See Table
See Table
Customer Instruments
200-240Volts
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-37
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-29 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Options 3PD, 3PY
21-111.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-38
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-30 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Options 3PD, 3PY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-39
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-31 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Option 3PN
21-111n.wpg
AC mains inputcord/plug provided
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-40
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: PDU Wiring Diagrams
Figure 6-32 E2197A xDSL / POTS Bay Option 3PN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-41
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options
Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options
� 79000 systems shipped prior to the 3070 Series 3 used one E1135B PDU in the testhead and those shipped shortly after the 3070 Series 3 used one E1135C PDU.
� Early shipments1 of Series 3 testheads used the E1135B PDU. Later shipments used the E1135C PDU.
� Module Power Units (MPUs) with Power Factor Corrected (PFC) Power One2 power supplies began shipping on Series II systems in January 1998. All Series 3 systems, both 3070 and 79000, have PFC Module Power Units (MPUs). PFC reduces crest current caused by switching power supplies. This resulted in a reduction in power consumption and service conductor size.
� Beginning with the release of Series 3, the controllers were plugged into 208–240 volt outlets, reducing service conductor size. The controller products requiring unswitched power were plugged into the PDU.
� Beginning with the release of Series 3, in 2-PDU single-phase systems, the outlet boxes were removed from the Support Bay and the DUT power supplies were connected directly to the outlets on the rear of the PDU in the Support Bay.
� Beginning in June 1999, the DUT power supplies were set to 220 or 2403 volts4 input in all systems, reducing the current demand and service conductor size.
� Beginning in June 1999, the equipment connected to the outlets on the E1135C in the 3070 were redistributed for improved load balancing.5
� Beginning in June 1999, all of the outlets on the rear panel of the E1135C PDU were changed to a two-circuit with four-outlets per circuit configuration.6
1 Shipped between July 24, 1998 and Sept. 4, 19982 Power One Power Factor Corrected (PFC) power supplies can be identified by model number: Non-PFC model number =
HPM5B2A8BEBQ5236 or PFC Model number = HPF5B2A8BEBQ5437. Plug J5 on the rear corner of the power supply is rotated 90degrees on the PFC model. The plug retaining clips are parallel to the short side of the supply on the PFC model and parallel to the longerbottom of the supply on the non-PFC model.
3 220 volts for 200–220 volts and 240 volts for 230–240 volts.4 See Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion, for setting the DUT power supply input voltage.5 See the 3070 / 79000 Repair Manuals, Chapter 1B, for additional information.6 See the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Operating and Service Manual, E1135-90001, for additional information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-42
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options
� In June 1999, the followings changes were made to the Corporate Price List (CPL).
Removed Options:
05A (200 V 2-Phase Open Delta with Phase Center-Tap Neutral)
0EF (120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral) (Replaced by AWW)
Added Options:
0ED (200 V 3-phase Delta)
05C (220 V 3-phase Delta)
05H (230 V 3-phase Delta)
0E6 (240 V 3-phase Delta)
AWW (120/208 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (Replaced 0EF))
AWV (120/208 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral)
AWZ (127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral)
AWY (100/200 V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral)
AWX (200 V Single-Phase Non-earthed)
� Series 3 current requirements were re-calculated and empirically checked, verifying lower current requirements when all the above enhancements were implemented.
� Beginning in July 2000, all three-phase systems were shipped with power cords. The power cord used is based on the power option and country code.
� Beginning in November 2000, power options are ordered on the E1135C PDU instead of the 3070 / 79000 / xDSL / POTS bays. For example: E1135C Opt. AWW is ordered instead of E99XXA Opt. AWW.
� Beginning in November 2000, only 3-phase power options are available for 3X7X and E2197A products.
� Beginning in May 2001, the PDU includes 20-centimeter-long (8-inch) power cords with female plugs hard-wired to the output terminal block. This means that the testhead outlet boxes can be unplugged rather than un-wired from the terminal block, making PDU replacement much easier. The following figures do not show this plug connection between the terminal block and the outlet boxes.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 6-43
Chapter 6: Site Preparation – Power Requirements: Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options
� In May 2001, the number of power options was reduced from nine to three and changed as shown in Table 6-5.
Table 6-5 New Power Options
NEW Power
Options
Description1 OLD Power
Options
Description
(line-to-neutral / line-to-line)
3PD 200–240 V 3-phase Delta 0ED 200 V 3-phase Delta
05C 220 V 3-phase Delta
05H 230 V 3-phase Delta
0E6 240 V 3-phase Delta
3PY 208–220 V 3-phase Wye AWW 120 / 208 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
05E 127 / 220 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
3PN 380–415 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral 0E5 220 / 380 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
05L 230 / 400 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral
0E7 240 / 415 V 3-phase Wye with Neutral1. Regardless of the power option, the system always operates at 200–240 volts.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-1
7777 Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Compressed Air Requirements, 7-2
� Vacuum Requirements, 7-4
� Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer, 7-19
IntroductionBoth compressed (or pressurized) air and vacuum are used in the Agilent 3070 / 79000 testhead. Compressed air is used primarily to secure the test fixture to the testhead. Vacuum is used primarily to actuate the test fixture: that is, to make contact between the board under test and the probes in the fixture. Compressed air is sometimes also used for air-assisted, solenoid-actuated valves used to switch the vacuum, and for air-actuated test fixtures.
The site preparation requirements for compressed air and vacuum are different depending on the type of testhead you are preparing the site for. This chapter describes those requirements. For more about compressed air and vacuum principles and terminology, see the short Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer on page 7-19.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-2
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air Requirements
Compressed Air Requirements
This section contains:
� Connecting Air to the Testhead, 7-2
� Compressed Air Specifications, 7-2
� Air Quality, 7-3
The Agilent 3070 / 79000 family uses compressed air to pressurize air cylinders that actuate fixture pull-down towers. Pull-down towers are used to pull and hold a fixture down onto the testhead, enabling contact
between the pins on the fixture and the spring-loaded interface pins in the testhead.
Compressed Air SpecificationsTable 7-1 shows the compressed air specifications for the 3070 / 79000 family systems. The air flow rates when using Performance Port are the maximum that could be needed. Some installations might require lower volumes.
Connecting Air to the TestheadInstall compressed air lines using rigid line to a point near the testhead. An air cutoff valve is recommended
for situations when the air line must be disconnected.
When the system is installed, connect the air to the testhead with a flexible line that has a Hansen Series
Table 7-1 Compressed air specifications for 3070 / 79000 systems
Description Measurement
Maximum Pressure for Testhead Only 1035 kPa (150 psi)
Minimum Pressure for Testhead with Performance Port 690 kPa (100 psi)
Minimum Pressure for Testhead Only 480 kPa (70 psi)
Minimum Flow Rate for Testhead Only 0.66 l/s at STP (1.4 SCFM) 1
Minimum Flow Rate for Testhead with Performance Port 7.1 l/s at STP (15 SCFM)
Relative Humidity allowed 70% for compressed air (150 psi) at 25 degrees C50% for compressed air (150 psi) at 40 degrees CDew point must be not more than 5 degrees C
1. l/s is liters per second. STP is standard temperature and pressure. SCFM is standard cubic feet per minute. See the Com-pressed Air and Vacuum Primer on page 7-19.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-3
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air Requirements
3000 Push-tite 1/4-inch female coupling or equivalent (Agilent PN 0100-1655). The testhead air input connector is shown in Figure 7-1 on page 7-3.
Figure 7-1 Compressed air connection to the testhead
Air QualityThe compressed air must be oil-free and must meet the humidity specifications in Table 7-1. We recommend that the air be filtered to remove contaminants such as oil and aerosols. The filter should filter 0.3-micron particles.
AIR2.WPG
03066-67911
Air Output forexternal
applications
Air Inputconnector on
rear of testhead
Air regulatorinside testhead
0100-1655female
coupling
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-4
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Vacuum Requirements
This section contains:
� Vacuum System, 7-4
� Vacuum Recommendations, 7-4
� Connecting Vacuum to the Testhead, 7-5
� Vacuum Guidelines, 7-9
� Vacuum Examples, 7-9
� Vacuum Control Assembly, 7-17
Vacuum SystemThe Agilent 3070 / 79000 family system uses vacuum (with vacuum-actuated test fixtures) to pull the board
under test down onto test probes. Because of the different sizes of test systems, test fixtures, and the variety of boards that can be tested, vacuum requirements can vary significantly.
Agilent recommends that you work with a qualified vendor of vacuum pumps that can give you advice based on your requirements.
Vacuum RecommendationsTable 7-2 shows the vacuum recommendations for a typical 3070 / 79000 family system.
Table 7-2 Vacuum recommendations for 3070 / 79000 systems
Description Measurement
Recommended Flow Rate of Pump
18.9 l/s at STP (40 SCFM)1 Use this value as a guideline. Vacuum specification is dependent on the fixture, not the Agilent 3070 / 79000 testhead. Agilent has found this specification will pull down most fixtures.
Pressure Performance 50 kPa (7.2 psi)1
Vacuum Control Ports available for controlling external vacuum valves
4 vacuum control ports: switched 24 volts dc, 750 milliamps maximum per port
1. l/s is liters per second. STP is standard temperature and pressure. SCFM is standard cubic feet per minute. psi is pounds per square inch. See the Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer on page 7-19.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-5
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Connecting Vacuum to the TestheadAgilent 3070 Series I and Series II testheads do not have vacuum-switching solenoids (valves)1 inside the testhead, so external vacuum solenoids must be installed near the testhead to control the vacuum. If vacuum hoses need to be disconnected from the testhead in order to service it, you can switch off the vacuum using the external solenoids.
The 3070 Series 3 and 79000 testheads have vacuum solenoids (valves) inside the testhead, so they usually do not need external vacuum solenoids. In order to turn off vacuum and remove the vacuum hoses before servicing this testhead, you should install a vacuum cut-off valve near the system.
Figure 7-2 on page 7-6 shows the four vacuum ports at the back of the 307X Series I and II testhead and their outlets near the modules. Figure 7-3 on page 7-7 shows the 317X Series I and II vacuum ports and outlets. Figure 7-4 on page 7-8 shows the vacuum port locations on 3X7X and 79000 Series 3 systems. The vacuum manifolds shown are a part of the optional vacuum system for 317X and 307X Series 3 systems.
1 There is an exception: any one-module (327X) Series I, II or 3 or 79000 testhead always includes one internal vacuum solenoid valve. A second internal vacuum solenoid valve is optional.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-6
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-2 307X Series I, II vacuum ports
Vacuum Outlet 2
site_prep5.wpg
Top of Testhead
Rear of Testhead
2 3
0 1
Vacuum Ports,1-inch, maleconnectors
Vacuum Outlet 0
Vacuum Outlet 3 Vacuum Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-7
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-3 317X Series I, II system vacuum ports
Vacuum Outlet 2
Vacuum Outlet 3
site_prep18.wpg
Top of Testhead
Rear of Testhead2 3
Vacuum Ports,1-inch maleconnectors
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-8
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-4 3X7X Series 3 and 79000 vacuum port locations
307X Series 3 Testhead with Support Bay
E1135C PDU (Main)
E1135C PDU (Main) E1135C PDU (Branch)
View with reardoor open
317X Series 3 Testhead
Port2Port3
In0ut
Port3
Port2
In0ut
E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)
79000 Testhead
Port1Port0 Port2
Port3
In
E1135C PDU (Main)
3279 Series 3 Testhead
0ut
Port3 Port2Optional Optional
E9998-632002-Module Manifold*
E9900-632004-Module Manifold
*Note: The E9998-63200 manifold will not work on the 3279 or 79000 testhead
In0ut
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-9
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Vacuum GuidelinesKeep these additional guidelines in mind as you design your system:
CAUTION
✸Vacuum pumps installed for the tester should be installed outside or vented outside in order to prevent the vacuum pump from exhausting oil-bearing air or carbon fragments in areas where there are people.
� Use the largest diameter of pipe practical from the vacuum pump to the testhead area. This diminishes vacuum loss due to friction in the piping (especially at bends), and provides a demand reservoir.
� Agilent also recommends that a filter be installed between the vacuum supply and the testhead to prevent dirt or contaminants from being sucked through the test fixture into the vacuum supply.
Vacuum ExamplesThis section shows some of the vacuum control schemes possible for the 3070. The pressure meters, flow meter, and filter in these examples are optional but recommended.
If the vacuum manifold is used, a 2-inch vacuum hose should be used. If vacuum ports are connected individually, a 1-inch vacuum hose must be used.
Figure 7-5 on page 7-10 is a schematic representation of a two-module 307X system with one vacuum control output used to control both vacuum ports 2 and 3. The vacuum control solenoid is shown to be one of the air-piloted types, thus the compressed air line to the device.
Figure 7-6 on page 7-11 shows a four-module 307X system with separate control of each vacuum port. This arrangement allows each vacuum port to be actuated separately, but this flexibility requires the expense of four solenoid valves and filters. The size and type of boards you test may make it unnecessary for you to individually control the four ports. If all the boards that you test are large and require all four modules, there is no reason to individually control the four ports.
Figure 7-7 on page 7-12 shows a four-module 307X system with two solenoid valves and two manual vacuum valves.
In this example, the two solenoid valves always control one port, but each may control a second vacuum port if a manual valve is opened.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-10
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-5 24-Vdc air-piloted solenoid vacuum example
Support Bay
Testhead
0 1
2 3
Air Line
VacuumSource
PressureMeter
24 VdcAir-PilotedSolenoid
Filter
site_prep3.wpg
1-inch flexibletubing
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-11
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-6 Individually activated vacuum port control example
Support Bay
Testhead
0 1
2 3
Air Line
VacuumSource
PressureMeter
24 Vdc Solenoid Filters site_prep2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-12
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-7 Vacuum with manual cutoff example
Support Bay
Testhead
0 1
2 3
VacuumSource
PressureMeter
24 VdcSolenoid Filter
site_prep4.wpg
FlowMeter
24 VdcSolenoid
Filter
ManualValve
ManualValve
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-13
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-8 on page 7-14 shows the 317X with the E9945A vacuum option installed.1 Figure 7-9 on page 7-15 shows the 307X with the E9946A vacuum option installed. Figure 7-10 on page 7-16 shows the 3279 and 79000 with the E9945A vacuum option installed.
The factory default relay wiring is shown; however, the vacuum solenoid (valve) is not voltage polarity sensitive. The vacuum solenoid valves are air pressure assisted with 280 kPa (40 psi) applied to each valve. A vacuum filter is not shown, since the air passes through the vacuum solenoid before the filter; however, you may desire to install a filter to keep vacuum lines from picking up unwanted materials.
1 Vacuum valve inside diameter (ID) is 0.75 inch and outside diameter (OD) is 1.5 inches.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-14
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-8 317X Series 3 with E9945A vacuum option
VacuumSource Pressure
MeterS3SiteP4
Port 3
+_
+_
+_
+_
+_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12RemoteShutdownJumper
+_
+_+_
+_
+_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
Relay 2
Relay 1
Relay 3
Relay 4
Relay 5
Port 2
System Card
E9998-632002-Module Manifold
PressureMeter
2-inch Vacuum HoseManual Cut-off Valve
E9945A Vacuum components shown above the dotted line
Vacuum components below the dotted line are customer supplied
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-15
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-9 307X Series 3 with E9946A vacuum option
E9946A Vacuum components shown above the dotted line
Vacuum components below the dotted line are customer supplied
VacuumSource Pressure
MeterS3Sitep3.wpg
Port 3
+_
+_
+_
+_
+_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12RemoteShutdownJumper
+_
+_+_
+_
+_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
Relay 2
Relay 1
Relay 3
Relay 4
Relay 5
Port 2
Port 1
Port 0
E9900-632004-Module Manifold
System Card
2-inch Vacuum HoseManual Cut-off Valve
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-16
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-10 3279 and 79000 vacuum system with optional vacuum valve
VacuumSource Pressure
Meter79KSitep.wpg
Port 3
+_
+_
+_
+_
+_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12RemoteShutdownJumper
+_
+_+_
+_
+_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Relay 2
Relay 1
Relay 3
Relay 4
Relay 5
Port 2
StandardVacuum Valve
System Card
PressureMeter
2-inch Vacuum Hose
Manual Cut-off Valve
Optional Vacuum ValveE3770-67900
Standard/Optional Vacuum components shown above the dotted line
Vacuum components below the dotted line are customer supplied
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-17
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Vacuum Control AssemblyThe Agilent E4047A Vacuum Control Assembly and Installation Kit, shown in Figure 7-11, contains everything necessary to connect the main vacuum supply line to the board test system without internal vacuum valves.
The E4047A Vacuum Control Assembly is a pre-assembled metal housing. Features include two 24 Vdc, air-assisted, 3-way vacuum solenoid-actuated valves; in-line vacuum filters; air pressure regulator; manual valve for 1-channel or 2-channel operation.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-18
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Vacuum Requirements
Figure 7-11 E4047A vacuum control assembly
25
20
15
10
5
030
KAYP neum at i cs
P neum at i cs
KAY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-19
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer
Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer
This section contains:
� Introduction, 7-19
� Compressed Air, 7-19
� Vacuum, 7-19
IntroductionThere are two key concepts involved in understanding the compressed air and vacuum requirements for the Agilent 3070 / 79000 system. The first is pressure and the second is flow rate.
Pressure is the force per unit area that a gas exerts on a surface. If zero is used as a reference, the measurement of pressure is called “absolute”; if the local atmospheric pressure is used as a reference, the measurement is called “gage.” Although atmospheric pressure varies with altitude and weather, gage pressure is typically used for engineering measurements, so it is used in this manual. A pressure value below zero gage is considered a vacuum.
Common units for measuring pressure are kilopascals (kPa), pounds per square inch (psi), and atmospheres (atm).
Flow rate is the quantity of a gas moving through a given area per unit of time. Since air is compressible, you must know both the speed and pressure of the air when measuring the flow rate. To reduce confusion, the industry has agreed on a standard set of conditions for flow rate measurements called “standard temperature and pressure” (STP). The standard temperature is zero
degrees Celsius (32 degrees Fahrenheit), and the standard pressure is one atmosphere (101.3 kPa or 14.7 psi).
Common units for measuring flow rate are liters per second (l/s) and cubic feet per minute (CFM). When using standard conditions, the units are written as “l/s at STP” or “SCFM” (standard cubic feet per minute).
Compressed AirThe 3070 uses compressed air to activate both the fixture pull-down towers and the vacuum valves. The 3070 also provides an outlet for supplying air to accessory equipment such as handlers and air assisted fixtures.
The minimum pressure needed is 480 kPa (70 psi). The 3070 has an internal regulator to restrict the maximum pressure inside the system to 550 kPa (80 psi).
The flow rate needed is dependent on how often fixtures are changed, but is generally much less than what is available in most production areas. Additional air (flow rate) may be needed to supply the outlet for custom fixtures or presses depending on their requirements.
VacuumThe 3070 doesn’t use any vacuum directly, rather the vacuum is used by the fixture to pull a device under test (DUT) onto the probes. The 3070 provides valves, plumbing and control to assist in supplying vacuum to the customer’s fixture.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 7-20
Chapter 7: Site Preparation – Compressed Air and Vacuum Requirements: Compressed Air and Vacuum Primer
The pressure requirements for vacuum come from the need to compress the probes, fixture springs and seals. Since most commercial vacuum systems operate around 50 kPa (7.5 psi), vacuum fixtures are limited in their ability to handle DUTs with high probe densities. If the sum of the probe, spring and seal forces divided by the area of the DUT is above 48 kPa (7 psi) the fixture will not be able to properly pull the DUT onto the probes.
The flow requirements for vacuum come from fixture leaks, number of fixture cycles per minute, the size of the DUT and the need to quickly evacuate the fixture to make a good seal around the DUT. Due to the variability of these factors, it is difficult to provide an exact flow rate recommendation. Agilent has found that a flow rate of 19 l/s (40 SCFM) will pull down most fixtures.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-1
8888 Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Local Area Network Requirements, 8-2
� Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking, 8-10
� Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking, 8-13
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-2
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Local Area Network Requirements
This section contains:
� Introduction, 8-2
� Agilent Local Area Network Plan, 8-2
� Sample 3070 Series I Network Scheme, 8-2
� Agilent 3070 Series II Networking, 8-5
� Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 Networking, 8-7
IntroductionYour Agilent 3070 / 79000 family board test system communicates with other systems via IEEE 802.3 Local Area Networking. All the necessary software and licensing comes with the system, but you will need to purchase and install the LAN cabling and associated LAN hardware external to the system. For help, contact your area’s Agilent Local Area Network specialist.
Begin planning your LAN with the steps below, depending on whether you have an existing LAN on-site:
� If you already have a facility LAN — With a Local Area Network already in place, all you need to do is work with your facility LAN expert to integrate the 3070 / 79000 system into your LAN.
� If you do not have facility LAN — If the 3070 / 79000 system will be your first LAN system, now is the time to make your Local Area Network plans. Time spent preparing for LAN will save
expense and trouble in the future. For help, contact your area’s Agilent LAN specialist. Designate a LAN manager at your site, and begin developing that person’s expertise.
Agilent Local Area Network PlanBe sure to add LAN planning to your system plan drawing. Show how the system relates to existing LAN and planned LAN growth. Your Agilent representative will use it when the system is installed.
Sample 3070 Series I Network Scheme1
The 3070 Series I family systems are shipped with a recommended list of host names and IP addresses. The ’/etc/hosts’ and ’/etc/netlinkrc’ files contain the suggested names and addresses. If you are connecting to a facility LAN, or if you ever plan to connect to a facility LAN in the future, you will need to change the IP addresses. Even if you need to change the IP addresses, you should consider using the suggested naming convention. The remainder of this section describes the recommended naming convention.
The sample ’/etc/hosts’ file sets up nine 3070 Series I systems:
hp3070a hp3070b hp3070c hp3070d
1 This networking configuration is no longer supported.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-3
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
hp3070e hp3070f hp3070g hp3070h hp3070i
Each of these systems may have up to five diskless workstations (called Test Development Stations). For example, hp3070a could have these workstations:
Figure 8-1 on page 8-4 shows a small network that uses this scheme.
In Figure 8-1 on page 8-4, there are three 3070 Series I systems. hp3070a, hp3070b, and hp3070c are systems with disks. These could be either testhead controllers or Test Development Centers; from the LAN standpoint it does not matter.
hp3070a has no workstations, known as Test Development Stations, associated with it. Only the hp3070a boots from the disk that is connected to it. Perhaps this system is a testhead with high usage.
hp3070b has two workstations with it: hp3070b1 and hp3070b2. These two nodes share the disk connected to hp3070b, and they boot from that disk. This could be a board test system or a Test Development Center. Note that if the system has a testhead, the disk and the controller must serve two Test Development Stations as well as the testhead, and that could slightly slow the system’s test throughput.
hp3070c has five workstations associated with it. This configuration probably makes the most sense if hp3070c is a Test Development Center. The cluster around
hp3070c might be used by a program development group.
Even a small network can be set up in many different ways. It is important to carefully plan for your needs before installing the LAN so that the configuration can provide maximum flexibility and benefit.
Install the LAN CablingBefore the 3070 / 79000 family system is delivered, install and test the external LAN interface cabling.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-4
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Figure 8-1 An example of 3070 Series I family networkp3070a5
hp3070a
hp3070b1
hp3070b1
hp3070b
hp3070c1 hp3070c2 hp3070c3
hp3070c4 hp3070c5
hp3070csitep13.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-5
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Agilent 3070 Series II NetworkingNetworking is very versatile with the 3070 Series II system. Before installing the Series II system, fill in the table below with the system name and IP address of the testhead controller and every other new controller in your Series II network.
An example of the 3070 Series II internal testhead and external LAN connections is shown in Figure 8-2 on page 8-6. The optional LAN/Gateway is only used if a HP 9000 712/60/100 controller is used. All other Series 700 controllers have an GPIB card installed in the controller.
Install the LAN CablingBefore the 3070 / 79000 family system is delivered, install and test the external LAN interface cabling.
System Name IP Address
Testhead Controller
Other Controller #1
Other Controller #2
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-6
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Figure 8-2 An example of 3070 Series II network
15.3.112.3Optional LAN/Gateway for712/60/100 Controllers only
15.3.112.2Sys Card
HUB
10BaseT
50 � Terminator1250-0207
Test DevelopmentCenter
Router /Gatewayas needed
Public LAN /Backbone
Public LAN /Backbone
System 1 on Hub
System 2..n on Hub
s2lan
TestheadController
BNC Tee1250-0781
To HP-IBDevices
Test DevelopmentStation
External Site Lan
Internal Testhead Lan
Mod. 0Control
Mod. 1Control
Mod. 2Control
Module 3Control
10Base2
Control Cables E1170-61604
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-7
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 NetworkingNetworking with the 3070 / 79000 system has been simplified by having all test servers contain a hard drive. The concept of a diskless work workstation has been eliminated with 3070 Series 3 and the 79000. The test servers are connected to the LAN the same way as any other servers.
With software revision B.03.00 in each testhead the LAN has been extended to the ControlXT cards, as shown in Figure 8-3 on page 8-8. Each external site LAN interface (LAN0) must have a unique IP address, but the internal testhead LAN interface (LAN1) within each system is identical, including identical System Card and ControlXT Card LAN addresses. However, the hardware address for each System Card and ControlXT is unique. The hardware address, not to be confused with the LAN address, is assigned at the factory and is marked on each card. See the Repair manuals for information on how to read and change the system files to match the hardware address of the cards in the system.
The 3070 with MS Windows networking, shown in Figure 8-4 on page 8-9, is very similar to the 3070 with HP-UX networking. The major change is the internal IP addresses.
Install the LAN CablingBefore the 3070 / 79000 family system is delivered, install and test the external LAN interface cabling.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-8
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Figure 8-3 An example 3070 Series 3 / 79000 network
*15.3.112.2Sys Card
*15.3.112.4Mod. 0
ControlXT
*15.3.112.5Mod. 1
ControlXT
*15.3.112.6Mod. 2
ControlXT
*15.3.112.7Mod. 3
ControlXT
HUB
10Base2Converter
10BaseT
50 � Terminator1250-0207
50 � Terminator1250-2076
TestServer
TestServer
Router /Gatewayas needed
Public LAN /Backbone
Public LAN /Backbone
System 1 on Hub
System 2..n on Hub
s3lan
0960-1009
10Base2
TestheadController
BNC Tee1250-0781
External Site Lan
To ACPower
Control CablesE4000-61628
10BaseT
*15.3.112.1 for HP-UX
* 15.x.xxx.x becomes 10.x.xxx.x beginning with systems shipped in May 2000
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-9
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Local Area Network Requirements
Figure 8-4 An example 3070 Series 3 3070 MS Windows network
10.3.112.2Sys Card
10.3.112.4Mod. 0
ControlXT
10.3.112.5Mod. 1
ControlXT
10.3.112.6Mod. 2
ControlXT
10.3.112.7Mod. 3
ControlXT
HUB
10Base2Converter
10BaseT
50 � Terminator1250-0207
50 � Terminator1250-2076
TestServer
TestServer
Router /Gatewayas needed
Public LAN /Backbone
Public LAN /Backbone
System 1 on Hub
System 2..n on Hub
s3-PClan.wpg
0960-1009
10Base2
TestheadController
BNC Tee1250-0781
External Site Lan
To ACPower
Control CablesE4000-61628
10BaseT
10.3.112.10 for PC
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-10
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking
Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking
Use this section as a tool to gather necessary information from the network administrator so it can be entered when the system is set up.
Choose from the two situations below and follow the associated instructions.
� If the UNIX-based controller WILL NOT be connected to a network:
Complete only the first two items (Hostname (Required even if the system is non-networked) and IP Address) in Table 8-1.
� If the UNIX-based controller WILL be connected to a network:
Complete Table 8-1.
CAUTION
✸Do not configure to a DHCP network server. Factory tests have shown this configuration to be unstable.
NOTEDNS and NIS are the only supported network protocols for UNIX systems.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-11
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking
Table 8-1 HP-UX LAN configuration information
Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description
CAUTION
✸Consult with the network administrator. Incorrect entries can cause system and network conflicts and errors.
1 Hostname(Required even if the system is non-networked)
The name by which this controller will be known. It must contain no more than eight characters, contain only letters, numbers, underscore (_), or hyphen (-), and start with a letter.
NOTEUpper-case letters are not recommended.
The first component of a host name should contain no more than eight characters, for compatibility with the uname command.
2 IP Address
(Required even if the system is non-networked) . . .
Supply a network IP address for this system ORIf not connecting to a network, supply an IP address that will not be a conflict should this system should ever get connected to a network.
3 Will this system be connected to a network?
[ ] Yes [ ] No Select either Yes or No. If selecting no, make no further entry in this table.
4 Subnetwork Mask . . .
The subnetwork mask address ignores information that is not specific to the local network.
5 Gateway Host Name The machine designated to connect outside of the subnet. If there is not a designated machine for this, use the Hostname (Required even if the system is non-networked) from Task 1.
6 Gateway IP Address. . .
The address designated to connect outside of the subnet. If there is not a designated address for this, use the IP Address from Task 2.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-12
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for UNIX Startup and Networking
7 Local Domain Name The company domain name.
8 DNS Server Hostname (Domain Name System)
If configuring DNS, the local network DNS server name.Do not complete if configuring for NIS.
9 DNS Server IP Address. . .
If configuring DNS, the local network DNS server IP address.Do not complete if configuring for NIS
10 NIS Domain Name If configuring NIS, the local NIS server name.Do not complete if configuring for DNS.
NOTEMost systems do not use NIS.
11 Wait for NIS Server on Bootup? [ ] Yes [ ] No If configuring NIS, select either Yes or No.Do not complete if configuring for DNS.
12 Will this TDS be a Font Server? [ ] Yes [ ] No Select either Yes or No. Ask yourself, will X-terminals be served by this system?
Table 8-1 HP-UX LAN configuration information (continued)
Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-13
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking
Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking
Before the Customer Engineer (CE) can turn on the controller, they will need the information in Table 8-2. Before they come to the site, fill out the appropriate information with the assistance of the network administrator or LAN manager. This is vital information they will need to set up the system for networking. Some of the information may not be needed depending on how your networking is implemented. Even if you don’t intend to put the system on a network at all, the
first two items in the table are still necessary for system set-up. In case of problems, see the Administering Agilent 3070 Systems (MS Windows Version), which is online in the User Manuals.Gathering Network Configuration Information
Use this section to gather the information needed to configure your computer for a LAN.
Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information
Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description
1 Network Identification
� Computer Name, or� Hostname
Domain Computer Name or Hostname:
A unique name that identifies your computer controller.
2 Network Identification
� Workgroup or Domain?Member of (select one):[ ] Workgroup[ ] DomainWorkgroup or Domain name
The Workgroup name is the name of a computer or group of computers on a peer-to-peer network.
The Domain name is the identifier for the server that controls and manages a group of computers on a client/server network.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-14
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking
3 Network Identification
� Create a Computer Account in the Domain
Domain User Name:
Domain Password:
This is the name by which your computer is recognized by the network domain. See your network administrator to establish or verify domain account information.
4 Will a DHCP Server be Used? [ ] Yes [ ] No If yes, go to Task 16 (Will Other Network Protocols Be Configured?).
5 IP Address IP Address:
. . .Subnet Mask:
. . .Default Gateway:
. . .
The IP address for this workstation.
This number masks (ignores) information that is not specific to your local network.
IP address of the system that is used to route network traffic to other networks.
6 Advanced IP Addressing
� Gateways . . .
. . .
Gateway(s) for any backup routers of network traffic.
7 Will DNS be Used?
(Domain Name System) [ ] Yes [ ] No If no, go to Task 12 (Will WINS Be Used?).
Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information (continued)
Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-15
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking
8 DNS
� HostnameThe name by which this system will be known under DNS is the same as the Computer Name, or in Task 1.
9 DNS
� DomainThe domain in which this machine will operate. This domain is associated with your TCP/IP address.
10 DNS
� DNS Service Search Order . . .
. . .
IP Addresses (in order) of DNS servers that this system uses for resolving host names.
11 DNS
� Domain Suffix Search Order
Ordered domain suffix list used when searching for a host.
12 Will WINS Be Used?
(Windows Internet Name Services) [ ] Yes [ ] No If no, go to Task 16 (Will Other Network Protocols Be Configured?).
13 WINS Address
� Primary WINS Server
� Secondary WINS Server
. . .
. . .
14 WINS Address
� Checkboxes[ ] Enable DNS for Windows Resolution[ ] Enable LMHOSTS Lookup
Check or uncheck either of these boxes as applicable.
CAUTION
✸If configuring for DNS, check Enable DNS for Windows Resolution.
Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information (continued)
Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 8-16
Chapter 8: Site Preparation – Communications Cabling Requirements: Gathering Configuration Information for MS Windows Networking
15 WINS Address
� Scope ID
16 Will Other Network Protocols Be Configured?
[ ] AppleTalk Protocol
[ ] DLC Protocol
[ ] NetBEUI Protocol
[ ] NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible Transport
[ ] Point To Point Tunneling Protocol
[ ] Streams Environment
This list is not exhaustive; other protocols can be configured. Use this space to document other network protocol information.
Table 8-2 Windows NT LAN configuration information (continued)
Task (Network Parameter) Write System Information Here Description
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-1
9999 Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Inventory The Shipment, 9-2
� Uncrating The System, 9-3
� Placing The System, 9-15
� Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System, 9-16
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-2
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Inventory The Shipment
Inventory The Shipment
Use the packing list that came with your system to determine if the system was fully received. Carefully examine the boxes for shipping damage. If you suspect the system was damaged in shipment, contact your Agilent representative.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-3
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Uncrating The System
This section contains:
� Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series I System, 9-3
The customer should removed the tri-wall box from the pallet. The Agilent CE will uncrate the system pallets. The systems are shipped on pallets as described in Table 9-1.
Leave the smaller boxes intact for the Agilent representative to unpack when the system is installed.
Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series I SystemRefer to Figure 9-1 on page 9-4 for uncrating a 307X system and Figure 9-2 on page 9-5 for uncrating a 317X system.
WARNING
✸Follow the unpacking instructions carefully and do not work alone. A fully loaded 307X Series I system with the shipping pallet might weigh 725 kilograms (1600 pounds). A fully loaded 307X Series II or a 317X system with the shipping pallet might weigh 455 kilograms (1000 pounds).
Table 9-1 System Shipping Pallets
System Type Pallets
317X Series I One pallet — Testhead only
307X Series I One pallet — Testhead and Support Bay on same pallet
317X Series II / 3 One pallet — Testhead only
307X Series II / 3 Two pallets — Testhead and Support Bay or Quick Verify on separate pallets
327X Series II / 3 One pallet — Testhead only
79000 One pallet — Testhead only
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-4
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Figure 9-1 307X Series I pallet
Step 6
Steps 9 and 10
Remove SupportBay brackets with6-mm hex wrench
Remove 3.5 inch bolts with the9/16-inch open-end wrench
Remove all four pallet support bolts and allsixteen bracket bolts from the pallet with the9/16-inch open-wrench or a socket
Remove Testhead Bracketswith 5-mm hex driver wrench
inst17.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-5
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Figure 9-2 307X, 327X Series I pallet
Tools Needed to Uncrate the System:� A floor jack to lift the system � Two people to remove the system, preferably
more � One pair of diagonal cutters or wire cutters � Safety glasses
Uncrating Procedure:The system is shipped with a 9/16-inch open-end wrench and a 5-millimeter hex wrench. 307X systems also includes a 6-millimeter hex wrench for the removal of the support bay shipping brackets.
1 If you have a long floor jack (two meters or six feet long), use it on the RAMP END to move the pallet.
Step 6
Steps 9 and 10
Remove Testhead bracketswith 5-mm hex wrench
inst18.wpg
Remove all four pallet support bolts and all eight bracket boltsfrom the pallet with the 9/16-inch open-wrench or a socketRemove 3.5-inch bolts with the
9/16-inch open-end wrench
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-6
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
If you have only small floor jacks, you may find it easier to move the big pallet with one floor jack on each end.
2 Place the pallet so that the system has room to roll off to the side. The proper side of the system is where you can see the "RAMP END" label. Leave three meters (10 feet) of clearance at the rear of the pallet for the system to roll off into. This clearance provides sufficient room for the people who are handling the system.
WARNING
✸The straps are stretched tight and will whip when cut. To avoid injury from flying straps, stand clear of the straps when you cut them, and always wear eye protection!
3 With diagonal cutters, cut the straps that hold the cardboard box on the pallet.
4 Remove the plywood board from the top of the box. Then remove the box.
NOTEThe Agilent Customer Engineer (CE) will complete the remainder of this procedure.
5 Cut the interior strap on the ramp. After you have cut the strap, the feet of the ramp should swing out. If
they do not, make sure the feet are perpendicular to the ramp when you lower the ramp to the floor.
The bag labeled "See Inside" that contains installation instructions also contains the hex wrench or wrenches (5 millimeter for the testhead and 6 millimeter for the support bay if included) and the 9/16-inch open-end wrench.
NOTESave the installation procedure that is packed with the system for the Agilent representative to use when your system is installed.
6 With the 9/16-inch open-end wrench, remove the two 3.5-inch bolts that go through the bottom of the pallet into the two-inch by six-inch board that holds the ramp.
NOTESince the pallet feet only allow sufficient room to remove the 3.5-inch bolts with a box or open-end wrench, you should not attempt to remove these bolts with a 9/16-inch socket wrench.
7 Make sure the ramp feet are in their proper positions, and then lower the ramp to the ground.
8 Remove the plastic bags and foam padding from the tester.
9 Retrieve the hex wrenches shipped with the system to help you unbolt the shipping brackets from the tester.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-7
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Using the 5-millimeter hex wrench, remove all the bolts that fasten the brackets to the testhead. Remove the brackets from the pallet with the 9/16-inch open-end wrench or a socket wrench.
10 If you have a 307X system, push the testhead away from the support bay to provide better access to the support bay’s shipping brackets. Remove the bolts connecting the support bay to the brackets with the 6-millimeter hex wrench. Remove the remaining bolts from the support bay brackets with the 9/16-inch open-end wrench or a socket wrench.
11 With the 9/16-inch open-end wrench or a socket wrench, remove the four seven-inch bolts that stabilize the deck of the pallet. This prevents the casters from catching on them when you roll the system off of the pallet.
12 Before rolling the system off of the pallet:
� Clear all people, tools, and equipment from the area that the system will roll into.
� Make sure the leveling feet for both the testhead and support bay, if included, are up. Otherwise, the feet may drag against the pallet and bend.
� For a 307X system, replace the foam that was placed between the testhead and the support bay to prevent scratching and denting of the cabinets.
WARNING
✸Use at least two people to roll the tester off of the pallet. For a 307X system, one person should steady the two bays as the second pushes them down the ramp.
Be careful not to push against the plastic skirt that surrounds the modules of the testhead.
13 Discard all the packing material and the pallet, unless you anticipate shipping the system to another facility.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-8
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Uncrating an Agilent 3070 Series II/3 and Agilent 79000 System
WARNING
✸The testhead weighs approximately 454 kilograms (1000 pounds). To avoid personal injury, follow these instructions carefully and do not work alone. The shipping straps are stretched taut and will whip when cut. Wear eye protection when cutting straps.
In uncrating the testhead, you will roll the testhead down a ramp from one end of the pallet. To do this you will need an area approximately 8 feet (2.5 meters) wide by 18 feet (5.5 meters) long.
Tools Needed to Uncrate the Testhead� Utility knife
� Cordless drill with hex power shank from Agilent/MTBU
� 9/16-inch and 3/4-inch sockets with ratchet and 6-inch (150-millimeter) extension
Uncrating Procedure1 Cut the strap around the ramp. Lift the ramp off the
pallet and set it aside. Remove the plastic bag covering the testhead and discard it. Discard all packing materials.
2 Remove two 150-millimeter (6-inch) bolts from a plastic bag attached to the ramp.
3 Figure 9-3: Remove the “Removable End” board from the pallet:
a Remove bolts 1 through 4 from the sides and bottom of the pallet.
b Remove bolts 5 and 6 from the platform.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-9
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Figure 9-3 Removing the bolts from the end board
4 Figure 9-4: Using a cordless drill with hex power shank and 3/4-inch socket, screw the bolts from step 2 into the nuts on the shipping brackets on the end of the pallet from which you removed the end board. Screw the bolts down (clockwise) until the platform rises slightly.
5 Figure 9-4: Remove two foam blocks from the space between the platform and pallet.
6 Figure 9-4: After removing the foam blocks, screw the 6-inch bolts up (counter-clockwise) to lower the platform all the way down onto the pallet. Alternately lower each side a little at a time. Then remove the 6-inch bolts.
Testhead
Remove 6 BoltsUNCRAT1.WPG
1
2
4
3
56
Removable End
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-10
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Figure 9-4 Raising and lowering the platform
7 Figure 9-5: Place the ramp on the pallet. Ensure that the feet under the ramp are folded down to the floor. Place two bolts that you removed from the sides of the pallet in step 3 through the holes in the ramp to keep the ramp from sliding off the pallet.
Testhead
UNCRAT2.WPG
PlatformPallet
Foam Block
ShippingBracket
contacts a metal plateon the pallet.
Note: The 6-inch bolt
6-inch bolt Use cordlessdrill, extension power shankand 3/4-inch impact socketor 3/4-inch wrench
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-11
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Figure 9-5 Attaching the ramp
8 Remove all four shipping brackets from the testhead and pallet.
9 Roll the testhead down the ramp and onto the floor.
NOTEAdvise the customer to save the pallet, ramp, and shipping materials in case the customer needs to ship the system to another facility. The only safe way to ship the testhead is using the pallet and shipping materials provided.
U NC RA T3.W PG
Testhead
BoltRamp
Platform
Foot
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-12
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Uncrating the Support Bay
WARNING
✸The Support Bay weighs approximately 209 kilograms (460 pounds). To avoid personal injury, follow these instructions carefully and do not work alone. The shipping straps are stretched taut and will whip when cut. Wear eye protection when cutting straps.
In uncrating the Support Bay, you will roll the Support Bay down a ramp from the pallet. To do this you will need an area approximately 6 feet (2 meters) wide by 13 feet (4 meters) long.
Tools Needed to Uncrate the Support Bay:� Utility knife
� 7/16-inch socket with ratchet
� 9/16-inch socket with ratchet
Uncrating Procedure:1 Remove the ramp and packing material from the top
of the Support Bay and remove the packing material from around the outside of the Support Bay.
2 Figure 9-6: Remove the two shippin clamps (one on each side) from the bottom of the Support Bay (1, 2).
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-13
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
Figure 9-6 Removing the shipping hardware
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-14
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Uncrating The System
3 Figure 9-7: Remove the two bolts from each corner (1) and pull the block out from under the bay (2). Position the ramp so the block of wood under the
ramp locks into the edge of the pallet. Then roll the bay down the ramp (3).
Figure 9-7 Installing the ramp
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-15
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Placing The System
Placing The System Moving the Testhead and Support BayMake sure all leveling feet are turned up as high as they go before rolling the system.
Place the system exactly as the system plan drawing shows. Remember that the testhead will be rotated up for service and that cable length will be critical.
Immobilizing and Leveling the SystemImmobilize and level all bays by screwing the leveling feet down to the floor. The testhead may be difficult to unlock or rotate if it is not level.
If local building codes require equipment to be anchored to the floor due to potential seismic activity (earthquakes), you will need to bolt the system to the floor. The shipping brackets used to secure the system to the pallet are suitable for this purpose, but you will need to supply fasteners suitable for your situation.
If you are installing an 44990A EFS Board Handler into an automated test cell, the integration specialist will need to bolt the testhead to the floor. Refer to the 44990A EFS Board Handler Manual, 44990-90004, for more information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-16
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System
Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System
When it becomes necessary to pack and ship a 3070 / 79000 system to another location, Agilent can help. You can either purchase an Agilent Move, which includes Agilent personnel disassembling, packing, shipping, and setting up the system at the new location; or you can purchase a shipping kit from Agilent, which includes the pallet and other materials required to ship a 3070 system.
As when a system is installed, when a system is moved, the procedures should be performed by an Agilent-trained technician. The Shipment Kit part numbers are listed in Table 9-2 and Table 9-3.
Other Shipment Kits were being designed at the time of this printing. To order or inquire about a Shipment Kit in the U.S. contact Agilent’s Measurement System
Knowledge Center (MSKC). In the U.S. call 1-800-593-6635 with your MSKC support handle. Outside the U.S. call your local Agilent Service Representative to access the MSKC.
WARNING
✸When re-shipping a support or instrument bay, DO NOT use the ramp to move the bay onto the pallet to avoid possible injury due to the bay tipping over on you. The ramp is designed for removal of the bay only. Instead, use a hoist and attach to the hooks on the top of the bay and lift the bay onto the pallet.
Table 9-2 Shipment kit special option product numbers
Testhead Support Bay POTS Bay Controller
Series I 307X, 317X 44813A Opt. 555 (Testhead and Support Bay Pallet)
n/a 44813A Opt. 551 (19-in. Bay)
Series II 307X, 317X 44813A Opt. 565 44813A Opt. 567 44813A Opt. 567 n/a
Series II 327X 44813A Opt. 566 n/a 44813A Opt. 567 n/a
Series 3 307X, 317X, 3070 (Win), 790001
44813A Opt. 570 44813A Opt. 572 44813A Opt. 572 n/a
Series 3 327X, 327X (Win) 44813A Opt. 571 n/a 44813A Opt. 572 n/a1. 3070 MS Windows system must use a pallet received after March 2000.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 9-17
Chapter 9: Site Preparation – Receiving and Moving Instructions: Re-shipping a 3070 and 79000 System
Table 9-3 Board handler shipment kit special option product numbers
Special Option to Part Number Listing44813A Opt. 555 = 03066-69901
44813A Opt. 560 = 44990-85200
44813A Opt. 565 = E4000-69901
44813A Opt. 566 = E4000-69902
44813A Opt. 567 = E4000-69903
44813A Opt. 570 = E9900-69901
44813A Opt. 571 = E9997-69901
44813A Opt. 572 = E9900-69902
Product Number
44990A EFS Board Handler 44813A Opt. 560
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-1
10101010 Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Introduction, 10-2
� Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001), 10-5
� Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000), 10-78
� Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II), 10-109
� Connecting Mains Power To The System, 10-143
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-2
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Introduction
Introduction This chapter provides power requirements and wiring information for older Agilent 3070 family systems. This includes systems that used earlier models of power distribution units (PDUs).
The E1135A/B PDU is no longer manufactured; the E1135C replaced it.
Power is connected to both E1135A and E1135B the same way. The power connections are very similar for the E1135C, except the input power is connected to a mains disconnect switch. If you want information on a current Series 3 systems, see Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements.
CAUTION
✸The wire sizes recommended in this chapter are for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system. The electrician has the responsibility to size the service to the receptacle so that the voltage drop from the source to the 3070 system does not exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.
NOTEIf a replacement E1135C is being installed and the recommended conductor size is greater than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), which is the largest conductor size that will easily fit in the E1135C PDU, see the section Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU on page 11-84.
There are two easy ways to determine whether you have a Series I or a Series II system: The Series II system has the "Series II" logo printed on the front of the testhead, and it has the wide pods (integrated cabinets) on both sides of the testhead. See Figure 10-1 on page 10-4 to identify where the power distribution unit (PDU) or power distribution kit (PDK) is located on your system. Figure 10-1 shows the rear views of the older 3070 and 3070 Series II family testheads and support bays.
Following are important points to note about Figure 10-1:
� The 317X Series I system is the only one that uses the E1170-80003 PDK. The PDK has the same functionality as the older E1099A PDU, but is re-packaged to fit in the testhead (see the 3070 Theory & Repair Manual, Chapter 4, E4000-90120, for details).
The 307X Series I system is the only one that uses two E1131A PDUs or one 44940A/B or E1099A in the support bay; there is no PDU in the 307X Series I testhead. Each PDU requires its own ac mains supply.
� The older 317X Series II and 307X Series II systems use the E1131A PDU. The 307X Series II system has one PDU in the testhead cabinet and another in the support bay.
� The 307X Series I system is the only one that uses two E1135A/B PDUs in the support bay; there is no PDU in the 307X testhead. Each PDU requires its own ac mains supply.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-3
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Introduction
� The 317X Series II and 307X Series II systems use the E1135B PDU. Some 307X Series II systems have one PDU in the testhead cabinet and another in the support bay or Quick Verify cabinet. Each PDU requires its own ac mains supply.
� The 327X Series II system uses one E1135B PDU in the testhead.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-4
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: IntroductionFigure 10-1 Rear views of the 3070 / Series II family systems
317X Series II Testhead
E1135A or E1135B PDU
317X Series I Testhead
307X Series II Testhead with Support Bay
307X Series I Testhead with Support Bay
SYS_ID.WPG
E1170-80003 PDK
PDU #1 (Main): E1135A orE1135B
PDU #2 (Branch): E1135A or E1135B
E1135A or E1135B PDU (Main) E1135A or E1135B PDU (Branch)
View with reardoor open
Port3
Port2
In0ut
E1135B or E1135C PDU (Main)
327X Series II Testhead
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-5
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
This section contains:
� Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit Breakers, 10-5
� Series 3 / 79000 Power Distribution, 10-9
� 327X 1-Module System AC Outlets, 10-17
� 79000 - 1-Module System AC System, 10-28
� 317X 2-Module System AC Outlets, 10-39
� 307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets, 10-50
� 307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets, 10-60
� E2195/E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC Outlets, 10-67
Sizing the Input Wires and Circuit BreakersAll 3070 and 3070PC systems should be installed with a 30-amp breaker or fuse in each phase of the incoming power. The modules and instruments in the testhead are protected by circuit breakers or fuses in the power distribution unit.
Table 10-1 on page 10-6 shows the Full Load Amp (FLA) for each system type and for each 3-phase power option.
Table 10-2 on page 10-7 shows FLA for each system type and for each single-phase power options.
One of two different power cords and plugs are attached to each 3-phase system, depending on the country where the system will be installed:
� E1135-61611 - uses #10 AWG 5-conductor cord with NEMA plug that mates with NEMA L21-30.
Used by North America. Receptacle available locally.
� E1135-61610 - uses 5x6 mm2 5-conductor cord with a IEC 60309 plug and mating receptacle. Used Internationally.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-6
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Table 10-1 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (3-phase power)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 790003 317X 307X 3-phasexDSL/POTS Bay
1-phasexDSL/POTS Bay4 Opts/Current
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW5 120 / 208 13 14 18 24 12 AWV, 16
05E5 or 6 127 / 220 13 14 18 24 12 AWZ, 16
0E56 220 / 380 9 10 10 16 10 05M, 14
05L6 230 / 400 9 10 10 16 10 05F, 14
0E76 240 / 415 9 10 10 16 10 05J, 14
3-phase Delta 0ED6 200 13 14 18 24 12 AWY, 16
05C5 or 6 220 13 14 18 24 12 0E3, 16
05H5 or 6 230 13 14 18 24 12 03G, 16
0E65 or 6 240 13 14 18 24 12 0EH, 16
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.3. Calculated with 6 STC cards in the module.
4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power option that is on the same line as the E1135C power option.
5. Use E1135-61611 power cord with NEMA L21-30 receptacle/connector body.
6. Use E1135-61610 power cord with IEC 60309 32A 3-phase receptacle/connector body (included with the system)
L1
L3L2
N
G
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-7
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Table 10-2 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 79000 317X 307XTesthead
Support Bay xDSL/POTS Bay3 Opts/Current
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
AWV 120 / 208 17 19 20 24 15 AWY, 16
AWZ 127 / 220 17 19 20 24 15 AWZ, 16
05B 220 / 380 11 10 12 22 NA 05M, 14
05G 230 / 400 11 10 12 22 NA 05F, 14
05K 240 / 415 11 10 12 22 NA 05J, 14
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 19 20 24 24 15 14
05F 230 19 20 24 24 15 14
05J 240 19 20 24 24 15 14
L1 L2
GN
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-8
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
327X 79000 317X 307XTesthead
Support Bay xDSL/POTS Bay Opts/Current
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 19 20 24 24 15 AWY, 16
0EB 220 19 20 24 24 15 0E3, 14
0EJ 230 19 20 24 24 15 0EG, 14
0EC 240 19 20 24 24 15 0EH, 14
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200 19 20 24 24 15 16
0E3 110 / 220 19 20 24 24 15 14
0EG 115 / 230 19 20 24 24 15 14
0EH 120 / 240 19 20 24 24 15 141. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.3. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power option that is on the same line as the system power option.
Table 10-2 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
L1
L2G
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-9
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Series 3 / 79000 Power DistributionTo move a system to a location that requires a different power option, you may need to reconfigure the PDU and change where equipment is plugged in.
Find the section in Table 10-3 on page 10-10 (3-phase power) or Table 10-4 on page 10-13 (single-phase power) that describes:
� Your new system power option
� System type (the number of modules)
� Location of outlets
� Number of PDUs, as well as the figure page number which describes your power option wiring
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-10
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Table 10-3 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (3-phase power)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
327X Outlet LocationsFigure 10-2 on page 10-17
79000 Outlet LocationsFigure 10-13 on page 10-28
317X Outlet LocationsFigure 10-24 on page 10-39
307X Outlet LocationsFigure 10-35 on page 10-50
3-phasexDSL/POTS Bay Outlet locationsFigure 10-53 on page 10-69
1-phasexDSL/POTS Bay1 Opts/Current Figure 10-52 on page 10-68
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-11
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208
Figure 10-3 on page 10-18
Figure 10-14 on page 10-29
Figure 10-25 on page 10-40
Figure 10-36 on page 10-51, Figure 10-38 on page 10-53
Figure 10-54 on page 10-70
AWV, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
05E 127 / 220
Figure 10-3 on page 10-18
Figure 10-14 on page 10-29
Figure 10-25 on page 10-40
Figure 10-36 on page 10-51, Figure 10-38 on page 10-53
Figure 10-54 on page 10-70
AWZ, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0E5 220 / 380
Figure 10-5 on page 10-20
Figure 10-16 on page 10-31
Figure 10-27 on page 10-42
Figure 10-39 on page 10-54, Figure 10-41 on page 10-56
Figure 10-55 on page 10-71
05M, Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
05L 230 / 400
Figure 10-5 on page 10-20
Figure 10-16 on page 10-31
Figure 10-27 on page 10-42
Figure 10-39 on page 10-54, Figure 10-41 on page 10-56
Figure 10-55 on page 10-71
05F, Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
0E7 240 / 415
Figure 10-5 on page 10-20
Figure 10-16 on page 10-31
Figure 10-27 on page 10-42
Figure 10-39 on page 10-54, Figure 10-41 on page 10-56
Figure 10-55 on page 10-71
05J, Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
Table 10-3 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (3-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-12
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
3-phase Delta 0ED 200 Figure 10-3 on page 10-18
Figure 10-14 on page 10-29
Figure 10-25 on page 10-40
Figure 10-36 on page 10-51, Figure 10-38 on page 10-53
Figure 10-54 on page 10-70
AWY, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
05C 220 Figure 10-3 on page 10-18
Figure 10-14 on page 10-29
Figure 10-25 on page 10-40
Figure 10-36 on page 10-51, Figure 10-38 on page 10-53
Figure 10-54 on page 10-70
0E3, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
05H 230 Figure 10-3 on page 10-18
Figure 10-14 on page 10-29
Figure 10-25 on page 10-40
Figure 10-36 on page 10-51, Figure 10-38 on page 10-53
Figure 10-54 on page 10-70
0EG, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0E6 240 Figure 10-3 on page 10-18
Figure 10-14 on page 10-29
Figure 10-25 on page 10-40
Figure 10-36 on page 10-51, Figure 10-38 on page 10-53
Figure 10-54 on page 10-70
0EH, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
1. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. For the standard 3-phase power options with supplied power cord use the first column. If sin-gle-phase is absolutely required, use the options in the second column that is on the same line as the system power option. Rewiring of the PDU may be required.
Table 10-3 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (3-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-13
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
327X outlet locationsFigure 10-2 on page 10-17
79000 outlet locationsFigure 10-13 on page 10-28
317X outlet locationsFigure 10-24 on page 10-39
307X outlet locations Figure 10-45 on page 10-60
xDSL/POTS Bay1 Opts/CurrentFigure 10-52 on page 10-68Testhead Support Bay
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
AWV 120 / 208
Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
AWV, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
AWZ 127 / 220
Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
AWZ, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
05B 220 / 380
Figure 10-9 on page 10-24
Figure 10-20 on page 10-35
Figure 10-31 on page 10-46
Figure 10-42 on page 10-57, Figure 10-44 on page 10-59
05M, Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
05G 230 / 400
Figure 10-9 on page 10-24
Figure 10-20 on page 10-35
Figure 10-31 on page 10-46
Figure 10-42 on page 10-57, Figure 10-44 on page 10-59
05F, Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
05K 240 / 415
Figure 10-9 on page 10-24
Figure 10-20 on page 10-35
Figure 10-31 on page 10-46
Figure 10-42 on page 10-57, Figure 10-44 on page 10-59
05J, Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
L1 L2
GN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-14
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 Figure 10-11 on page 10-26
Figure 10-22 on page 10-37
Figure 10-33 on page 10-48
Figure 10-49 on page 10-64
Figure 10-51 on page 10-66
Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
05F 230 Figure 10-11 on page 10-26
Figure 10-22 on page 10-37
Figure 10-33 on page 10-48
Figure 10-49 on page 10-64
Figure 10-51 on page 10-66
Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
05J 240 Figure 10-11 on page 10-26
Figure 10-22 on page 10-37
Figure 10-33 on page 10-48
Figure 10-49 on page 10-64
Figure 10-51 on page 10-66
Figure 10-60 on page 10-76
Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-15
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
327X outlet locationsFigure 10-2 on page 10-17
79000 outlet locationsFigure 10-13 on page 10-28
317X outlet locationsFigure 10-24 on page 10-39
307X outlet locationsFigure 10-45 on page 10-60
xDSL/POTS Bay Opts/CurrentFigure 10-52 on page 10-68Testhead Support Bay
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
AWY, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0EB 220Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
0E3, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0EJ 230Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
0EG, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0EC 240Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
0EH, Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
L1
L2G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-16
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200
Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0E3 110 / 220
Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0EG 115 / 230
Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
0EH 120 / 240
Figure 10-7 on page 10-22
Figure 10-18 on page 10-33
Figure 10-29 on page 10-44
Figure 10-46 on page 10-61
Figure 10-48 on page 10-63
Figure 10-58 on page 10-74
1. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is on the same line as the system power option.
Table 10-4 Series 3 and 79000 family wiring diagram (single-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Testhead
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-17
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 10-2 327X 1-module system
Outlet 2
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 3
Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-18
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-3 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
32LLL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-19
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-4 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-20
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-5 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
32LLLN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-21
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-6 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-22
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-7 327X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
32LL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-23
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-8 327X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-24
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-9 327X 05B, 05G, 05K
32LLN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-25
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-10 327X 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-26
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-11 327X 05M, 05F, 05J
32LN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-27
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-12 327X 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-28
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
79000 - 1-Module System AC System
Figure 10-13 79000 1-module system
Outlet 2
Testhead (Rear View) E2190_ol.wpg
Outlet 1
Outlet 3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-29
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-14 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
79LLL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-30
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-15 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-31
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-16 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7
79LLLN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-32
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-17 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-33
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-18 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
79LL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-34
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-19 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-35
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-20 79000 05B, 05G, 05K
79K LLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-36
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-21 79000 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-37
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-22 79000 05M, 05F, 05J
79KLN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-38
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-23 79000 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-39
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 10-24 317X 2-module system
Outlet 0
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-40
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-25 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
31LLL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
CHECK COUNTRY CODEFOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-41
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-26 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-42
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-27 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
31LLLN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
CHECK COUNTRY CODEFOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-43
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-28 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-44
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-29 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
31LL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-45
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-30 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-46
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-31 317X 05B, 05G, 05K
31LLN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-47
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-32 317X 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-48
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-33 317X 05M, 05F, 05J
31LN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-49
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-34 317X 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-50
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets
Figure 10-35 307X 4-module 1-PDU system
Outlet 0
Support Bay(Rear View)
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-51
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-36 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
30LLL_1.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
CHECK COUNTRY CODEFOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-52
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-37 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-53
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-38 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6 (support bay)
30LLL_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-54
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-39 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7
30LLLN_1.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-55
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-40 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-56
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-41 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7 (support bay)
30LLLN_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-57
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-42 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K
30LLN_1.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-58
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-43 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-59
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-44 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K (support bay)
30LLN_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-60
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC OutletsBeginning with the release of Series 3, with 4-module 2-PDU systems, the DUT power supplies are connected directly to the E1135C PDU, and there are no outlet boxes in the Support Bay, as shown in Figure 10-45.
Since each of these options are single-phase, which outlet a DUT power supply connects to does not affect the load balance, but knowing where each power supply is plugged in helps when servicing the system.
Figure 10-45 307X 4-module 2-PDU system
Outlet 0
Support Bay(Rear View)
Testhead (Rear View)PDU
Branch
Main
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
5678
To Gnd
1234
To Gnd
See Table
See Table
See Table
See Table
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-61
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-46 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH
30LL_1.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
CHECK COUNTRY CODEFOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-62
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-47 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-63
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-48 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH (support bay)
30LL_2.wpg
CHECK COUNTRY CODEFOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-64
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-49 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J
30LN_1.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-65
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-50 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-66
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-51 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J (support bay)
30LN_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-67
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
E2195/E2197A xDSL/POTS Bay AC OutletsThe instruments in the xDSL/POTS bay, except the Kikusui power supply, are plugged into the E1135C PDU.
With the E2197A xDSL/POTS bay the 6811B ringer supply is plugged into the E1135C PDU and the isolation transformer is removed.
See Communications Test for additional information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-68
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-52 E2195A xDLS / POTS Bay (shown with POTS options)
OTS1 WPG
Outlet 1 -
LineFilter
PDU
MainsInput
5678
To Gnd
1234
To Gnd
See Table
See Table
See Table
See Table
Customer Instruments
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-69
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-53 E2197A xDLS / POTS Bay (shown with POTS options)
Outlet 1 -
LineFilter
PDU
MainsInput
5678
To Gnd
1234
To Gnd
See Table
See Table
See Table
See Table
Customer Instruments
200-240Volts
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-70
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-54 E2197A xDLS / POTS Bay AWW, 0ED, 05C, 05E, 05H, 0E6
Ringer Supply
E2197LLL.wpg
Switched
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-71
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)Figure 10-55 E2197A xDLS / POTS Bay 0E5, 05L, 0E7
Ringer Supply
E2197LLLN.wpg
Switched
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-72
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-56 E2195A xDLS / POTS Bay AWW, 05E
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-73
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-57 E2195A xDLS / POTS Bay AWW, 05E
E2195LLLN.wpg
Switched
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-74
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-58 E2195A xDSL / POTS Bay AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
E2195LLN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-75
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-59 E2195A xDSL / POTS Bay AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
Switched
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-76
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-60 E2195A xDSL / POTS 05M, 05F, 05J
E2195LN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-77
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001)
Figure 10-61 E2195A xDSL / POTS 05M, 05F, 05J
Switched
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-78
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
This section contains:
� Introduction, 10-78
� Series 3 / 79000 Power Requirements, 10-80
� Power Recommentations, 10-82
� Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit Breakers, 10-89
� Connecting Power To The Testhead, 10-90
� “Mains” Wiring Diagrams, 10-101
� 220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7), 10-102
� 220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K), 10-102
� 120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWW, 05E), 10-103
� 120/208–127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWV, AWZ), 10-104
� 200-240 3-phase Delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6), 10-105
� 100/200-120/240 V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH), 10-106
� 220–240 V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J), 10-107
� 200–240 V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC), 10-108
IntroductionThis remaining sections of this chapter describe the electrical power requirements for 3070 Series 3 or 79000 family board test systems which have serial numbers shown in Table 10-5 and Table 10-6. See Appendix 10, Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDU for systems with serial numbers shown in Table 10-7 on page 10-79.
NOTEIf you are installing a new Agilent 3070 / 79000 Series 3 system with a serial number higher than those shown below, go to Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2001) on page 10-5.
NOTEThe Customer Engineer (CE) who does the installation has the responsibility of removing the testhead from the pallet. Therefore, the system power cannot be installed until after the CE has removed the system from the pallet.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-79
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Table 10-5 Serial numbers of Series 3 / 79000 systems with factory power reconfiguration reduction1 (but without power cords attached except 327X and 79000 power option AWW)
System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Number between
US38050137 and US38050120
US38240247 and US38240152
US38240409 and US38240243
US38240532 andUS38240240
1. DUTS and Controllers set to 220-240 volt operation and load balanced
Table 10-6 Serial numbers of Series 3 / 79000 systems shipped without power reconfiguration reduction1 (see Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion for how to reduce current requirements)
System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Numbers between
US38050119 and US38050109
US38240151 and US38240115
US38240242 and US38240139
US38240239 and US33240114
1. i.e., DUTS and Controllers are set to 100-120 volts.
Table 10-7 Serial numbers of Series 3 / 79000 systems shipped with E1135B PDUs.
System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Numbers between
US38050108 and US38050100
US38240114 and US38240100
US38240138 and US38240100
US38240113 and US33240100
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-80
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Series 3 / 79000 Power RequirementsThis section provides minimum power requirements for Agilent 3070 / 79000 Series 3 family systems for serial numbers shown in Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 on page 10-79. For most installations, these requirements are sufficient.
NOTEFor new 3070 / 79000 Series 3 systems, go to Table 10-1 on page 10-6.
NOTEThe loading and wire size information shown beside the values in brackets [ ] in tables in this chapter applies to 3070 / 79000 Series 3 systems which shipped after June 1999, (Table 10-5) or to systems reconfigured to match those which shipped after June 1999.
Series 3 systems shipped prior to June 1999 (Table 10-6) can substantially reduce their current requirements, as shown by comparing the values shown in brackets [ ] in the tables with the values beside them which are not shown in brackets. The reduced current requirements can be achieved by following the recommendations in Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion of this manual.
See Chapter 10, Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems for Series I, II power requirements. See the 3070 / 79000 Repair Manuals, Chapter 1B for the locations where instruments are plugged in for load balancing for Series II and Series 3.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-81
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
The 3070 / 79000 family systems with serial numbers shown in Table 10-5 on page 10-79 (3-phase) and Table 10-6 on page 10-79 (single-phase) require ac electrical power supplied two ways:
1 AC mains power must be supplied to the system’s Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
2 For 327X / 79000 systems using wire and breaker option #AWW, a power cord is supplied already wired to the PDU; these are the only systems shipped before May 2000 supplied with a power cord.
Figure 10-62 Opt. #AWW power plugAgilent makes the following recom-mendations:
GroundNeutral
30 A 120/208 V 3-phase male plugPart number for cord and plug - E1135-61611 forNorth America and E1135-61610 internationally.Cord is Hard Service (SO) Multi-Strand AWG 12/5Mating receptacle is a NEMA# L21-30
208Plug-20A m p.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-82
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Power RecommentationsAgilent makes the following recommendations:
� 3-phase power should be used if it is available.
� A separate ac mains service should be provided for the test system.
� Copper wire should be used for the system input.
� The service must have a mains disconnect installed adjacent to the system so that power can be quickly removed in case of an emergency. The E1135C PDU, used with 3070 Series 3 and 79000 systems, contains a mains disconnect. This input mains disconnect switch does not have short-circuit or over-current protection. The E1135C output terminals do have both short-circuit and over-current protection.
� A 25.4-millimeter (1-inch) hole is provided on the PDU for the electrician to install a cable clamp and power cord. Agilent recommends the use of a power cord E1135-61611 - uses #10 AWG 5-conductor cord with NEMA plug that mates with NEMA L21-30. Used by North America. Receptacle available locally. or a hard-wired connection.
� The system input power connections on the PDU are made to an input connector block and the ground connection to the chassis. In the E1135C the power is connected to the mains disconnect switch and a ground terminal attached to the chassis. These connectors can accept wire up to 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). For ease of
installation, in areas where it meets local code requirements, Agilent recommends that you use multi-strand wire from a box to the PDU.
� If needed, convenience outlets must be located near the system for external equipment, including for test servers, optional extra equipment bays, and automation equipment. Locate the outlets within one meter (three feet) of and directly behind the device. See Chapter 3 to plan the location of convenience outlets. All convenience outlets must supply 20 amps at 100–120 volts or 10 amps at 200–240 volts, whichever is applicable.
The power requirements for older 3070 Series 3 and 79000 family systems are shown in Table 10-8 on page 10-84 (3-phase) and Table 10-9 on page 10-86 (single-phase). The values shown in brackets [ ] are currents when the DUTS and controller are configured at 100-120 volts. The other values are currents with the DUTS and controller configured for 220-240 volts (See Chapter 11, Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion).
The maximum current or full-load amps (FLA) assumes fully-loaded systems with Serial Test Card power supplies. Note that the operating frequency range for the 3070 / 79000 family systems is 47–63 hertz, with the nominal line frequency either 50 hertz or 60 hertz.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-83
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
CAUTION
✸Ten thermal circuit breakers are located on the front of the E1135B/C PDU. These circuit breakers are designed to protect the loads on the output terminal block. Under normal operation, if an overload occurs, the rocker on the breaker will pop to the open position. The rocker can be reset by pushing it gently back in place. It is necessary to wait a few minutes for the breaker to cool before this can be done. A breaker which cannot be reset may be permanently damaged by a short-circuit at the load.
These breakers are not switches and must not be opened by force. If opened by force, permanent damage will result. Damage caused by intentionally opening the breaker is not covered by warranty.
The electrician should use the Full Load Amps (FLA) in Table 10-8 on page 10-84 for 3-phase and Table 10-9 on page 10-86 for single-phase systems to determine the conductor size to the power receptacle where the SO Cord, or service mains, will connect. Then use the sections Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit Breakers on page 10-89 and Connecting Power To The Testhead on page 10-90 to determine the SO Cord size and breaker size.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-84
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Table 10-8 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (3-phase power)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X / 790003 317X 307X 3-phasexDSL/POTS Bay
1- phasexDSL/POTS Bay4 Opts/Current
Testhead Support Bay
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208
[15]5 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 AWV, 16
05E 127 / 220
[15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 AWZ, 16
0E5 220 / 380
[13] 10 [14] 10 [22] 18 NA 10 05M, 14
05L 230 / 400
[13] 10 [14] 10 [22] 18 NA 10 05F, 14
0E7 240 / 415
[13] 10 [14] 10 [22] 18 NA 10 05J, 14
3-phase Delta 0ED 200 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 AWY, 16
05C 220 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 0E3, 16
05H 230 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 03G, 16
0E6 240 [15] 14 [23] 18 [42] 28 NA 12 0EH, 16
L1
L3L2
N
G
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-85
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
NOTEOption #05A is not available on the Corporate Price List (CPL) after June 1999. The DUT power supplies input voltage for Japanese systems are set to 220 volts at the factory and the neutral center tap is no longer used.
If 3-phase Delta power (0ED) is not available, use the Single-Phase power option (AWY). 307X single-phase option AWY systems will require two power drops.
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.3. Calculated with 6 STC cards in the module.4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is on the same line as the system power option.5. Values in brackets [ ] apply to Series 3 systems with serial numbers less than those listed in Table 10-6 on page 10-79.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-86
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Table 10-9 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X / 790003 317X 307X xDSL/POTS Bay4 Opts/CurrentTesthead Support Bay
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
AWV 120 / 208
[25]5 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 AWY, 16
AWZ 127 / 220
[25] 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 AWZ, 16
05B 220 / 380
[18] 11 [21] 12 [37] 22 NA 05M, 14
05G 230 / 400
[18] 11 [21] 12 [37] 22 NA 05F, 14
05K 240 / 415
[18] 11 [21] 12 [37] 22 NA 05J, 14
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 [22] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14
05F 230 [22] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14
05J 240 [22] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14
L1 L2
GN
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-87
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
327X / 79000 317X 307X xDSL/POTS Bay Opts/Current
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 AWY, 16
0EB 220 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 0E3, 14
0EJ 230 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 0EG, 14
0EC 240 [NA] 20 [36] 24 [42] 28 [20] 15 0EH, 14
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200
[25] 20 [43] 24 [43] 28 [24] 15 16
0E3 110 / 220
[25] 20 [43] 24 [43] 28 [24] 15 14
0EG 115 / 230
[25] 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14
0EH 120 / 240
[25] 20 [43] 24 [42] 28 [24] 15 14
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.
Table 10-9 Series 3 and 79000 family power requirements (single-phase power) (continued)
E1135C Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
L1
L2G
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-88
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
3. Calculated with 6 STC cards in the module.4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is the same line as the system power
option.5. Values in brackets [] apply to Series 3 systems with serial numbers less than those listed in Table 10-6 on page 10-79.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-89
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Sizing The Input Wires And Circuit BreakersTo ensure adequate peak voltage for proper operation of the system power supply, two minimum requirements must be met:
� A system drop must be connected to an ac source with at least the minimum voltage.
� The wire used for the drop must be sized to handle rms loads with less than a 5 percent of nominal voltage drop between the ac source and the system.
Table 10-10 on page 10-91 (3-phase) and Table 10-11 on page 10-92 (single-phase) directs you to another table listing the correct wire sizes and also to the correct wiring diagams for each power option.
Using a wire that is too small can cause a larger voltage drop from the transformer to the 3070 system. This could mean that the peak voltage into the PDU is not sufficient for proper operation. If the ac source provides more than the minimum voltage, then the maximum voltage loss between the source and the system is not as critical.
CAUTION
✸All power configurations using a neutral are unbalanced, so there will be neutral current. Therefore, the neutral conductor must be the same size as the phase conductors.
NOTEThe wire sizes recommended in this chapter are for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system. The electrician has the responsibility to size the wire to the receptacle so that the voltage drop from the transformer to the Agilent 3070 system does not exceed 5 percent of the nominal voltage.
The SO power cord conductors between the system power receptacle and the system should be the wire size listed in Table 10-12 through Table 10-17. This allows for easy manageability when connecting to the PDU.
The wire sizes from the transformer to the receptacle are the responsibility of the electrician.
After locating the correct wire size and breaker size in the following tables, return to Connecting Power To The Testhead on page 10-90 for drawings showing how to connect the power to the PDU.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-90
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Connecting Power To The TestheadThe power options available for Agilent 3070 Series 3 / 79000 with E1135C PDUs are shown in Table 10-10 on page 10-91.
After following the lock-out, tag-out procedure,1 have your electrician verify the voltage selection straps and jumpers and connect the mains power to the PDU as shown on the indicated power installation diagram.
WARNING
✺Hazardous voltages, capable of causing injury or death, are present inside the PDU as long as "mains" power is connected.
On the E1135C PDU, locking the Mains Disconnect switch in the ’O’ position disconnects "mains" power from the loads. However, "mains" power remains at the input terminals of the Mains Disconnect switch.
Disconnect "mains" power from the PDU before working on the input side of the Mains Disconnect switch and follow the lock-out, tag-out procedure.
Working with "mains" power must be performed only by trained and qualified service personnel.
Holes are provided in the front, side and rear covers for wire egress. For safety, strain relief cable clamps (0400-0377) must be used on all wires routed through these holes. All unused holes must be blocked by filler plugs (6960-0177).
1 A “lock-out, tag-out procedure is used by electricians. The electrician turns the “mains” power switch off and places a hasp through the “mains” power switch. The hasp has holes for pad-locks. A tag is placed on the lock which provides information regarding who put the lock in place, the work being performed, when the lock was installed, when the lock will be removed, and the electrician’s supervisor. Only the electrician who installed the lock or the electrician’s supervisor (under certain circumstances) may remove the lock and turn the “mains” power switch on.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-91
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
WARNING
✺To prevent the possibility of electrical shock, which could cause injury or death, always connect a "mains" power ground wire to the "G" chassis ground terminal in the PDU.
CAUTION
✸Do not turn on power at the external breaker. The Agilent representative will verify the power connection and the power itself before starting up the system.
NOTEIf the 3070 / 79000 system is moved to a different site, then the input and output wiring may need to be reconfigured. Refer to the PDU Upgrade Manual, E4030-90000.
Table 10-10 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (3-phase)
Description
E1135C Power Option Voltage
Wire and Breaker Size Table Number Wiring Diagram
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208 Table 10-12 on page 10-95 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
05E 127 / 220 Table 10-12 on page 10-95 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
0E5 220 / 380 Table 10-13 on page 10-96 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
05L 230 / 400 Table 10-13 on page 10-96 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
0E7 240 / 415 Table 10-13 on page 10-96 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-92
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
3-phase Delta 0ED 200 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105
05C 220 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105
05H 230 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105
0E6 240 Table 10-14 on page 10-97 Figure 10-65 on page 10-105
Table 10-11 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (single-phase)
DescriptionE1135C Power Option Voltage
Wire and Breaker Size Table Number Wiring Diagram
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
AWV 120 / 208 Table 10-16 on page 10-99 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
AWZ 127 / 220 Table 10-16 on page 10-99 Figure 10-64 on page 10-104
05B 220 / 380 Table 10-15 on page 10-98 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
05G 230 / 400 Table 10-15 on page 10-98 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
05K 240 / 415 Table 10-15 on page 10-98 Figure 10-63 on page 10-102
Table 10-10 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (3-phase) (continued)
Description
E1135C Power Option Voltage
Wire and Breaker Size Table Number Wiring Diagram
L1
L3 L2
G
L1 L2
GN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-93
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-67 on page 10-107
05F 230 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-67 on page 10-107
05J 240 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-67 on page 10-107
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
0EB 220 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
0EJ 230 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
0EC 240 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-68 on page 10-108
Table 10-11 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (single-phase) (continued)
DescriptionE1135C Power Option Voltage
Wire and Breaker Size Table Number Wiring Diagram
L1
NG
L1
L2G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-94
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
0E3 110 / 220 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
0EG 115 / 230 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
0EH 120 / 240 Table 10-17 on page 10-100 Figure 10-66 on page 10-106
Table 10-11 Series 3 and 79000 cross-reference tables (single-phase) (continued)
DescriptionE1135C Power Option Voltage
Wire and Breaker Size Table Number Wiring Diagram
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-95
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
* Three current-carrying conductors** Four current-carrying conductors*** Pigtail required (Appendix 10, Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)
Table 10-12 3-Phase Wye with neutral (AWW, 05E)
System Type
xDSL / POTS Bay 327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [20] 20 [30] 30 [60] 35
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)]** 4(12) [4 (12)] 4(12)* [10(8)] 6(10)* [25 (4)]*** 10(8)1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-96
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
** Four current-carrying conductors
Table 10-13 3-Phase Wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)
System Type
327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [30] 30 [30] 30
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)** [4 (12)] 4(12)** [10 (8)] 6(10)**1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-97
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
* Three current-carrying conductors** Four current-carrying conductors*** Pigtail required (Appendix 10, Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)
Table 10-14 3-phase delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6)
System Type
327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [30] 30 [60] 35
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)** [10(8)] 6(10)* [25 (4)]*** 6(10)1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-98
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
* Three current-carrying conductors*** Pigtail required (Chapter 10, Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)
Table 10-15 Single-phase Wye with neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
System Type
327X / 79000 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps1
[30] 20 [30] 20 [50] 30
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[6 (10)] 4(12)* [6 (10)] 4(12)* [16 (6)]*** 6(10)1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-99
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
* Three current-carrying conductors*** Pigtail required (Appendix 10, Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)
Table 10-16 Single-Phase Wye with neutral (AWV, AWZ)
System Type
xDSL / POTS Bay 327X / 79000 317X 307X 307X Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [35] 30 [60] 30 [60] 35 [30] 20
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)* [6 (10)] 6(10)* [16(6)] 6(10)*** [16 (6)]*** 10(8)* [6 (10)] 4(12)*1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-100
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
* Three current-carrying conductors*** Pigtail required (Chapter 10, Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.)
Table 10-17 Single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC) - Single-phase with center tap neutral (AWY, 0E3,0EG, 0EH) - Single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)
System Type
xDSL / POTS Bay 327X / 79000 317X 307X 307X Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps1
[20] 20 [35] 30 [60] 30 [60] 35 [30] 20
Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)2
[4 (12)] 4(12)* [6 (10)] 6(10)* [16(6)]*** 6(10)* [16 (6)]*** 10(8)* [6 (10)] 4(12)*1. Breaker size based on 125 percent of maximum rms current2. Wire size based on multiconductor cables
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-101
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
“Mains” Wiring DiagramsThe following diagrams show how the mains are wired. See the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Operating and Service Manual E1135-90001 for more information.
NOTESet the Voltage Selector switch (S1) on the Control Board to ’230V’ for all voltage options.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-102
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)
220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
Figure 10-63 220/380-240/415 3-phase Wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7), 220/380-240/415 Single-phase Wye with neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
L3L2L1 N
N 10A 10AG
1
0
T3T2T1
G
Connect InputLine here
Note: L3 is available only on 3-phase powerL1 L2
GN
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-103
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWW, 05E)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-104
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
120/208–127/220 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (AWV, AWZ)
Figure 10-64 120/208–127/220 V 3-Phase Wye with neutral (AWW, 05E), 120/208–127/220 V Single-phase Wye with neutral (AWV, AWZ)
L3L2L1 N
N 10A 10AG
1
0
T3T2T1
G
Connect InputLine here
Note: Install jumper between T2 and T3 for Single-Phaseoption for E1135C.
* Neutral is required only for POTS and xDSL Bay
L1
L3L2
N*
G
L1 L2
GN*
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-105
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
200-240 3-phase Delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6)
Figure 10-65 200-240 3-phase delta (0ED, 05C, 05H, 0E6)
L3L2L1 N
N 10A 10AG
1
0
T3T2T1
G
Connect InputLine here
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-106
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
100/200-120/240 V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)
Figure 10-66 100/200-120/240 V Single-phase center-tap neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)
L3L2L1 N
N 10A 10AG
1
0
T3T2T1
GJumper L2-L3
Connect InputLine here
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-107
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
220–240 V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)
Figure 10-67 220–240 V Single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J) Set
L3L2L1 N
N 10A 10AG
1
0
T3T2T1
G
Connect InputLine here
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-108
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Series 3 Power Requirements and Connections (Prior to May 2000)
200–240 V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)
Figure 10-68 200–240 V Single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)
L3L2L1 N
T3T2T1 N 10A 10AG
1
0
G
Jumper L2-L3
Connect InputLine here
L1
L2G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-109
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
This section contains:
� Identifying the PDU/PDK Type, 10-109
� Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU, 10-112
� 44964A/B PDU Electrical Requirements, 10-113
� E1099A PDU Electrical Requirements, 10-114
� E1170-80003 PDK Electrical Requirements, 10-124
� E1131A PDU Electrical Requirements, 10-125
� Agilent 3070 Series II / 3 - E1135A/B Power Distribution Units, 10-128
CAUTION
✸For Agilent 3070 Series I, II systems, improper ac mains wiring is the most common site preparation problem. To avoid problems, you must verify the source and make sure that the system drop conductor is sized correctly.
NOTEThe references in this chapter to two-phase power assume that you will be using a one-phase, center-tapped main to obtain the two phases.
NOTEThe external mains breaker should be located close to the 3070 family system. Some high voltages are present in the test system even with the tester breaker off. Having the external breaker close to the system will allow service personnel to turn off all power quickly.
NOTEYou cannot accurately measure the input current of the system’s power supplies using conventional 50/60-hertz current probes because the input current waveforms are rich in harmonics. Any current-measuring instrument should have a bandwidth exceeding 10 kilohertz. Using improper instruments can yield results that are 50 percent less than actual. Also, current demand depends on the tests that are running on the system.
Identifying the PDU/PDK TypeThis section describes planning and wiring mains power to the system. Plan to have an electrician run the power drop for the mains power before the Agilent representative comes to install the system. Use Table 10-18 on page 10-110 to determine the type or types of PDU or PDK that your system will have. Electrical requirements and power options for each of these are described in the following sections.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-110
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-18 Identifying PDU / PDK type
307X Series I System:
Shipped before 1/1/92: 44964A/B PDU See Figure 10-69 on page 10-144
Shipped 1/1/92 to 12/1/93: E1099A PDU See Figure 10-70 on page 10-145
Shipped after 12/1/93: E1131A PDU( See Figure 10-75 on page 10-155
317X Series I System:
All ship dates: E1170-80003 PDK See Figure 10-72 on page 10-149
3X7X Series II System:
Shipped before 7/7/95: E1131A PDU See Figure 10-75 on page 10-155
Shipped 7/7/95 - 11/21/96: E1135A PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 - Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
Shipped 11/21/96 - 9/4/98: E1135B PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 - Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
3X7X Series 3 System:
Shipped before 9/4/98: E1135B PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 - Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
Shipped after 9/4/98: E1135C PDU See Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements
POTS Bay:
Shipped before 7/7/95: has an additional E1131A PDU See Figure 10-75 on page 10-155
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-111
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Shipped 7/7/95 - 9/17/98: has an additional E1135A/B PDU See Figure 10-76 on page 10-159 - Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
E1085A POTS Bay or E2195A xDSL Bay See Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements or the E2195A xDSL and E1085A POTS Installation and Upgrade Manual, E1085-90000
Table 10-18 Identifying PDU / PDK type (continued)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-112
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDUThe E1135C PDU is the replacement for the E1131A, and E1135A/B PDUs. The input terminals on the E1135C on the mains disconnect switch easily fit conductor size 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). It is strongly suggested that if the recommended conductor size1 in the following tables is greater than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), that a 450 mm (18-inches) to 609 mm (24-inches) pig tail be created using 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG) conductor, and the recommended larger cable be connected to the pigtail. See Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU on page 11-84.
1 It is difficult to fit conductor size 16 square millimeters (AWG 6) into the mains disconnect switch, and 25 square millimeters (AWG 4) will not fit. With an 450 mm (18-inches) to 690 mm (24-inches length pigtail, 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG) will safely carry the 3070 load)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-113
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
44964A/B PDU Electrical Requirements1
Table 10-19 on page 10-113 shows the electrical requirements and line configuration options for the 44964A/B PDU. Maximum current describes option OE3 (200V) current requirements for a system with all optional equipment; other power options and configurations will require less current. In option 0EF (208 Volts) only two of the three phases are used in an unbalanced configuration.
CAUTION
✸The two- and three-phase options are unbalanced. Therefore, the neutral conductor should be the same size as the line conductors. (Refer to Figure 10-69 on page 10-144.)
1 See the 44964B Power Distribution Unit Installation and Service Manual, 03066-90032) for more information.
Table 10-19 44964A/B PDU power options
Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
Voltage:
Option 0E3 200 V (182–222 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EF 208 V (189–230 V rms) 3 phase wye with neutral
Option 0EB 220-230 V (200–244 V rms) 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EG 110/220-115/230 V (200–244 V rms 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EC 240 V (218–266 V rms)1 phase neutral center tap 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EH 120/240 V (218–266 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Maximum Total Current:
1 module 24 A
2 modules 36 A
3 modules 42 A
4 modules 50 A
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-114
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
E1099A PDU Electrical RequirementsTable 10-20 on page 10-114 shows the electrical requirements and line configuration options for the E1099A PDU. Maximum current describes option OE3 (200V) current requirements for a system with all optional equipment; other power options and configurations will require less current. In option 0EF (208 Volts), all three phases are used in an unbalanced configuration. Table 10-21 on page 10-117 through Table 10-27 on page 10-123 provide a means of more
accurately calculating the power requirements for various system configurations with each power option.
CAUTION
✸The two- and three-phase options are unbalanced. Therefore, the neutral conductor should be the same size as the line conductors. (Refer to Figure 10-70 on page 10-145.)
Table 10-20 E1099A PDU power options
Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz
Voltage:
Option 0E3 200 V (182–222 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EF 208 V (189–230 V rms) 3 phase wye with neutral
Option 0EB 220-230 V (200–244 V rms) 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EG 110/220-115/230 V (200–244 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Option 0EC 240 V (218–266 V rms)1 phase neutral center tap 1 phase no neutral
Option 0EH 120/240 V (218–266 V rms) 1 phase neutral center tap
Maximum Total Current:
1 module 41 A
2 modules 60 A
3 modules 77 A
4 modules 96 A
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-115
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-21 on page 10-117 is an example that illustrates how to use Table 10-22 through Table 10-27. Each power option table specifies the current required for system devices in the left column; these currents have been calculated at 9 percent below nominal voltage (worst case). List the current for devices that will be part of the installed system in the column to the right. (The currents for single-phase and three-phase systems should be balanced as closely as possible by plugging the devices into the appropriate outlets as designated in the tables. Your system will be shipped from the factory configured for the best current balance that can be obtained.) Total the device currents listed in each column to obtain the current required for each phase of mains power.
Table 10-21 illustrates the current requirements of a typical two-module system operating on two-phase power. Note how the devices are allocated to different outlets to try to balance the currents of the center-tapped phase; as in this example, these currents sometimes can’t be balanced exactly. The total current required is
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-116
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
36.2 amps (27.2 amps for Phase A to B, plus 9 amps for the larger of phase B to N or phase A to N currents.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-117
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-21 E1099A option 0EG mains requirements example
Device Current (Amps) 115/230 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap
Left & Right Outlets J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 10.5 10.5
Module 2 10.5 10.5
Module 3 10.5
Module 4 10.5
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.1
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: 27.2 + 9 = 36.2 Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-118
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-22 E1099A option 0EB mains requirements
Device Current (Amps) 220 Volts Single-Phase
Module 1 10.5
Module 2 10.5
Module 3 10.5
Module 4 10.5
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.1
DUT Power #1 3.0
DUT Power #2 3.0
DUT Power #3 3.0
DUT Power #4 3.0
Aux. Equipment 2.0
Controller/Peripherals 20.0
* Total current:
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-119
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-23 E1099A option 0EC mains requirements
Device Current (Amps) 240 Volts Single-Phase
Module 1 9.6
Module 2 9.6
Module 3 9.6
Module 4 9.6
+5 V STC P.S. #1 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #2 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #3 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #4 2.9
DUT Power #1 3.0
DUT Power #2 3.0
DUT Power #3 3.0
DUT Power #4 3.0
Aux. Equipment 2.0
Controller/Peripherals 20.0
* Total current:
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-120
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-24 E1099A option 0E3 mains requirements
Device Current (Amps) 100/200 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap
Left & Right Outlets J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 11.4 10.5
Module 2 11.4 10.5
Module 3 11.4
Module 4 11.4
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.4 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.4 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.4
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.4
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-121
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-25 E1099A option 0EG mains requirements
Device Current (Amps) 115/230 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap
Left & Right Outlets J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 10.5
Module 2 10.5
Module 3 10.5
Module 4 10.5
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.1
+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.1
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-122
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-26 E1099A option 0EH mains requirements
Device Current (Amps) 120/240 Volts Single-Phase w/Center Tap
Left & Right Outlets J50-J53, J64-J71
Module 1 9.6
Module 2 9.6
Module 3 9.6
Module 4 9.6
+5 V STC P.S. #1 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #2 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #3 2.9
+5 V STC P.S. #4 2.9
Front Panel Outlets
J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #2 6.0 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0
DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0 3.0 1.0
Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Phase A - B Phase B - N Phase A - N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-123
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-27 E1099A option 0EF mains requirements
Device Current (Amps) 115/230 Volts Single-Phase w/Center TapRight Outlets J50-J51 J64-J67
Left OutletsJJ52-J53, J68-J71
Module 1 11.0Module 2 11.0
Module 3 11.0Module 4 11.0
+5 V STC P.S. #1 3.3+5 V STC P.S. #2 3.3
+5 V STC P.S. #3 3.3+5 V STC P.S. #4 3.3
Front Panel Outlets J40,J41 - J44-J46 J42,J43 - J47-J49
DUT Power #1 6.0DUT Power #2 6.0
DUT Power #3 6.0DUT Power #4 6.0
Aux. Equipment 4.0Controller/Peripherals 40.0
* Total current: Ph B-C Ph C-A Ph B - N Ph A - N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-124
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
E1170-80003 PDK Electrical Requirements1
Table 10-28 shows the electrical requirements for Agilent 317X Series I systems.2 This table is valid for all power options. The power requirements are based on the maximum number of modules and DUT power supplies.
Verifying the AC InputBefore installing the "mains" drop for an E1170-80003 PDK, the ac source must be verified to assure that it is adequate to power the test system.
Sizing the Input Conductors and BreakersTo ensure adequate rms voltage for proper system power supply operation, a system drop connected to an ac source with the minimum voltage must be sized to handle rms current loads with less than a 5-percent drop between the ac source and the system. Using an inadequate conductor size can cause a voltage drop across the system drop. This could mean that the rms voltage into the PDK is not sufficient for proper operation. If the ac source provides more than the minimum voltage, then the maximum voltage loss between the source and the system is not as critical.
NOTEThe wire sizes recommended in this chapter are for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system. The electrician has the responsibility to size the service to the receptacle so that the voltage drop from the source to the 3070 system does not exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.
CAUTION
✸All power configurations using a neutral are unbalanced, so there will be neutral current. Therefore, make the neutral conductor the same size as the line conductors.
1 See the E1099A Power Distribution Unit Installation and Service Manual, E1099-90000, for more information.2 The E1170-80003 PDK was only used with 3170X systems, not 307X systems.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-125
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
E1131A PDU Electrical RequirementsTable 10-29 on page 10-126 and Table 10-30 on page 10-127 show the electrical requirements for 3070 Series I and II systems respectively, using the E1131A PDU. The tables are valid for all power options. The power requirements are based on the maximum number of modules and DUT power supplies available.
CAUTION
✸The voltage drop to the load must not exceed 5-percent of nominal for Single-phase and 3-phase power. With 3-phase options only two phases are loaded and the third is a without a load.
Verifying the AC InputBefore installing the "mains" drop for an E1131A PDU, the ac source must be verified to assure that it is adequate to power the test system.
Sizing the Input Conductors and BreakersTo ensure adequate peak voltage for proper system power supply operation, a system drop connected to an ac source with the minimum voltage must be sized to handle peak current loads with less than a 5-percent drop between the ac source and the system. Using the wrong conductor size can cause a larger voltage drop across the system drop. This could mean that the peak voltage into the PDU is not sufficient for proper operation. If the ac source provides more than the minimum voltage, then the maximum voltage loss between the source and the system is not as critical.
CAUTION
✸All power configurations using a neutral are unbalanced, so there will be neutral current. Therefore, make the neutral conductor the same size as the line conductors.
Table 10-28 E1170-80003 power requirements for all power options
System Type
317X
Full Load Amps (FLA)
29
Breaker Size in Amps
30
SO Cord Wire Size mm2 (AWG)
6 (10)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-126
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
NOTEThe wire sizes recommended in this chapter are for the SO cord1 from the receptacle to the system. The electrician has the responsibility to size the service to the receptacle so that the voltage drop from the source to the 3070 system does not exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.
1 SO - Service with Oil-resistant jacket
Table 10-29 3070 Series I, E1131A power requirements for all power options
317X 307X POTS Bay
Testhead (PDU #1) Support Bay (PDU #2)
Full Load Amps (FLA)
36 31 16 16
Breaker Size in Amps
40 40 20 20
SO Cord Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
10 (8) 10 (8) 4 (12) 4 (12)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-127
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-30 307X Series II, E1131A power requirements for all power options
317X 327X 307X POTS Bay
Uses E1135 Testhead (PDU #1) Support Bay (PDU #2)
Full Load Amps (FLA)
36 NA 31 16 16
Breaker Size in Amps
40 NA 40 20 20
SO Cord Wire Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
6 (10) NA 10 (8) 4 (12) 4 (12)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-128
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Agilent 3070 Series II / 3 - E1135A/B Power Distribution UnitsThe E1135A and E1135B were used in all Series II 3070 systems, and in Series 3 3070 and 79000 systems shipped through September 1998.
If you are working on a system with an E1135C PDU, see Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements.
This section provides minimum power requirements for 3070 family systems. For most installations, these requirements are sufficient. We suggest you review the next section, Verifying the AC Input on page 10-129, for additional information.
The 3070 family systems require ac electrical power supplied two ways:
1 AC mains power must be supplied to the system’s Power Distribution Unit (PDU). For all systems and power options except one, a customer-supplied power cord must be wired to the system’s PDU by an electrician.
2 For a 327X system using conductor and breaker option #0EF (3-phase Wye with neutral — 208V; see Table 10-32 on page 10-131) a power cord is supplied already wired to the PDU; this is the only system supplied with the power cord.
Agilent makes the following recommendations:
� A dedicated ac mains service should be provided for the test system due to the high current
requirements of the system (see Table 10-31 on page 10-130and Table 10-32 on page 10-131).
� Copper conductors should be used for the system drop.
� The service should have a breaker box installed near the system so that power can be quickly removed in case of an emergency.
� A 25.4-millimeter (1-inch) hole is provided on the PDU for the electrician to install a cable clamp and power cord. Agilent recommends the use of a power cord with a locking plug (one that cannot be easily pulled from its outlet) or a hard-wired connection. If the hole is too small to accommodate the conductors, use a chassis punch to enlarge the hole.
� The system input power connections on the PDU are made to an input connector block and the ground connection is to a terminal bolted to the chassis. These connectors can accept wire up to 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). For ease of installation, in areas where it meets local code requirements, Agilent recommends that you use multi-strand conductor from a box to the PDU.
3 Convenience outlets must be located near the system for test development centers, test development stations, optional extra equipment bays, and the 44990A EFS Board Handler. Locate the outlets within one meter (three feet) of and directly behind the device. See Chapter 3, Site Preparation – Planning to plan the location of convenience outlets. All convenience outlets must supply 20 amps at
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-129
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
100–127 volts or 10 amps at 200–240 volts, whichever is applicable.
The power requirements for 3070 Series II family systems with E1135A/B PDUs are shown in Table 10-31 on page 10-130 and Table 10-32 on page 10-131. The maximum current assumes fully loaded systems with Serial Test Card Power Supplies. Note that the operating frequency range for the 3070 family systems is 47–63 hertz when the nominal line frequency is 50 or 60 hertz.
Verifying the AC InputBefore installing the "mains" drop for an E1135A/B PDU, the ac source must be verified to assure that it is adequate to power the test system.
CAUTION
✸Improper ac mains wiring is the most common site preparation problem. To avoid problems, you must verify the source and verify that the system drop conductor is sized correctly.
NOTEYou cannot accurately measure the input current of the system’s power supplies using conventional 50/60-hertz current probes because the input current waveforms are rich in harmonics. Any current-measuring instrument should have a
bandwidth exceeding 10 kilohertz. Using improper instruments can yield results that are 50 percent less than actual. Also, current demand depends on the tests that are running on the system.
CAUTION
✸Ten thermally-activated circuit breakers designed to protect the output terminal block are located on the front of the E1135B PDU. Under normal operation, if a fault occurs, the rocker on the breaker will pop to the open position. The rocker can be reset by pushing it gently back in place. It is necessary to wait a few minutes for the breaker to cool before this can be done.
These breakers are not switches and must not be opened by force. If opened by force, permanent damage will result. Damage caused by intentionally opening the breaker is not covered by warranty.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-130
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-31 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU
System Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 317X 307X3 xDSL/POTS Bay4 Opts/CurrentTesthead Support Bay
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral 0EF (AWW) 120 / 208 15 23 42 15
05E 127 / 220 15 23 42 15
0E5 220 / 380 13 14 22 NA
05L 230 / 400 13 14 22 NA
0E7 240 / 415 13 14 22 NA
2-Phase Open Delta w/CT Neutral
05A 100 / 200 18 21 43 NA
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 120 volts ac for Opt. 0EF, 05E and 05A. 0E5. 05L, 0E7 set to 240 volts ac.3. 2- and 3- phase 307X systems only require one PDU. Single Phase systems require one PDU for the testhead and one for the support bay.
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-131
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is in the column below on the same line as the system power option.
Table 10-32 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU
System Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
327X 317X 307X3 xDSL/POTS Bay4 Opts/CurrentTesthead Support Bay
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
05B 220 / 380 18 21 37 NA
05G 230 / 400 18 21 37 NA
05K 240 / 415 18 21 37 NAL1 L2
GN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-132
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 22 36 42 24 15
05F 230 22 36 42 24 15
05J 240 22 36 42 24 15
Table 10-32 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU (continued)
System Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-133
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
327X 317X 307X3 xDSL/POTS Bay Opts/Current4Testhead Support Bay
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 NA 36 42 20 15
0EB 220 NA 36 42 20 15
0EJ 230 NA 36 42 20 15
0EC 240 NA 36 42 20 15
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200 25 43 42 24 15
0E3 110 / 220 25 43 42 24 15
0EG 115 / 230 25 43 42 24 15
0EH 120 / 240 25 43 42 24 15
1. Calculated with a fully-loaded 3X7X system with 3 STC cards in every module.2. DUT Power supplies are configured for 200-240 volts ac.3. 2- and 3- phase 307X systems only require one PDU. Single Phase systems require one PDU for the testhead and one for the support bay.
Table 10-32 3070 Series II family power requirements with E1135A/B PDU (continued)
System Power Option Voltage Full-Load Amps (FLA)1 for:2
L1
L2G
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-134
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
4. POTS and xDSL bays always require a separate power drop. Use the POTS/xDSL power options that is in the column below on the same line as the system power option.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-135
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Sizing the Input Conductors and Circuit BreakersTo ensure adequate peak voltage for proper operation of the system power supply, two minimum requirements must be met:
� A system drop must be connected to an ac source with at least the minimum voltage.
� The conductor used for the drop must be sized to handle peak current loads with less than a 5-percent drop between the ac source and the system.
Use Table 10-33 on page 10-136 and Table 10-34 on page 10-137 to direct you to another table listing the correct conductor sizes. Using a conductor that is too small can cause a larger voltage drop across the system drop. This could mean that the peak voltage into the PDU is not sufficient for proper operation. If the ac source provides more than the minimum voltage, then the maximum voltage loss between the source and the system is not as critical.
CAUTION
✸All power configurations using a neutral are unbalanced, so there will be neutral current. Therefore, make the neutral conductor the same size as the line conductors.
NOTEThe wire sizes recommended in this chapter are for the SO cord from the receptacle to the system. The electrician has the responsibility to size the wire to the receptacle so that the voltage drop from the transformer to the 3070 system does not exceed 5-percent of the nominal voltage.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-136
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-33 Conductor and breaker size cross reference table
System Power Option Voltage Wire and Breaker Size Table Number
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral 0EF (AWW) 120 / 208 Table 10-35 on page 10-139
05E 127 / 220 Table 10-35 on page 10-139
0E5 220 / 380 Table 10-36 on page 10-139
05L 230 / 400 Table 10-36 on page 10-139
0E7 240 / 415 Table 10-36 on page 10-139
2-Phase Open Delta w/CT Neutral
05A 100/200 Table 10-37 on page 10-140
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-137
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-34 Conductor and breaker size cross reference table (single-phase options)
System Power Option Voltage Wire and Breaker Size Table Number
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
05B 220 / 380 Table 10-38 on page 10-140
05G 230 / 400 Table 10-38 on page 10-140
05K 240 / 415 Table 10-38 on page 10-140
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 Table 10-40 on page 10-141
05F 230 Table 10-40 on page 10-141
05J 240 Table 10-40 on page 10-141
L1 L2
GN
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-138
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
0EB 220 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
0EJ 230 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
0EC 240 Table 10-41 on page 10-142
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
0E3 110 / 220 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
0EG 115 / 230 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
0EH 120 / 240 Table 10-39 on page 10-141
Table 10-34 Conductor and breaker size cross reference table (single-phase options) (continued)
System Power Option Voltage Wire and Breaker Size Table Number
L1
L2G
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-139
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-35 3-phase wye with neutral (0EF, 05E)
System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
20 20 30 50
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 6 (10) 10 (8)
Table 10-36 3-phase wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)
System Type
327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
20 20 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 4 (12) 6 (10)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-140
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-37 2-phase open delta with center tap of one phase (05A)
System Type
327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
20 30 50
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8)
Table 10-38 Single-phase wye w/neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
System Type
327X 317X 307X
Breaker Size in Amps
30 40 70
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 6 (10)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-141
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-39 Single- phase with center tap neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)
System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps
20 30 50 50 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8) 10 (8) 6 (10)
Table 10-40 Single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)
System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps
20 25 50 50 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8) 10 (8) 6 (10)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-142
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Tester Power Requirements (Series I/II)
Table 10-41 Single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)
System Type
POTS Bay 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Support Bay
Breaker Size in Amps
20 25 50 50 30
SO Cord Conductor Size mm2 (American Wire Gauge - AWG)
4 (12) 6 (10) 10 (8) 10 (8) 6 (10)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-143
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Connecting Mains Power To The System
This section contains:
� Introduction, 10-143
� 44964A/B AC Mains Connection, 10-144
� E1099A AC Mains Connection, 10-145
� Connecting Power to the E1170-80003 PDK, 10-146
� Connecting Power to the E1131A PDU, 10-150
� Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDU, 10-157
IntroductionHave your electrician connect the mains power to the PDU or PDK as shown on the power installation diagrams in the next few sections. Use Table 10-18 on page 10-110, to determine which figure should be used.
CAUTION
✸Do not turn on power at the external breaker. The Agilent representative will verify the power connection and the power itself before starting up the system.
NOTEThe electrician will not be able to measure true current to the system because power consumption is dependent on the testplan, and the crest factor of switching power supplies causes a non-sinusoidal waveform.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-144
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
44964A/B AC Mains Connection
Figure 10-69 44964A/B AC mains connection1
1 See the 44964B Power Distribution Installation and Service Manual, 03066-90032, for more information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-145
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
E1099A AC Mains Connection
Figure 10-70 E1099A ac mains connection1
1
1 See the E1099A Power Distribution Installation and Service Manual, E1099-90000, for more information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-146
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Connecting Power to the E1170-80003 PDKRotate the testhead, if necessary, to access the top of the PDK. Using a T20 Torx driver, remove 6 screws to access the mains terminals as shown in Figure 10-71.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-147
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Figure 10-71 Accessing the mains terminals in the E1170-80003 PDK
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-148
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Using a 1/4-inch flat blade screwdriver, connect the mains conductors to the mains terminals as shown in Figure 10-72.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-149
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The SystemFigure 10-72 Wiring the mains to the E1170-80003 PDK
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-150
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Connecting Power to the E1131A PDUFigure 10-73 shows the location of PDU #1 and PDU #2 in a 307X support bay.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-151
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Figure 10-73 Locating E1131A PDU #1 and PDU #2
(Branch)
(Main)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-152
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Using a T20 Torx driver, remove 5 screws to access the mains terminals as shown in Figure 10-74.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-153
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Figure 10-74 Accessing the mains terminals in the E1131A PDU
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-154
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
The Protective Earth Ground connector is provided for attaching an additional (redundant) ground conductor for safety in case the mains ground conductor should fail.
Using a 1/4-inch flat blade screwdriver, connect the mains conductors to the mains terminals as shown in Figure 10-75.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-155
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The SystemFigure 10-75 Wiring the mains to the E1131A PDU
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-156
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
E1131A Main/Branch ConnectionThe Emergency Shutdown main/branch connections between the two PDUs in a 307X support bay are wired at the factory, so no wiring is necessary during installation.
However, if you have multiple 3070 / Series II family systems, and you want the Emergency Shutdown switch on one system to also shut down one or more other systems, some additional wiring is necessary. To implement parallel remote emergency shutdown, all systems must have E1131A PDUs; older PDUs do not have this capability. For wiring instructions, see the E1131A Power Distribution Unit Installation and Service Manual (E1131-90000).
WARNING
✺Hazardous voltages and currents may exist beneath the covers of the PDU, even when all PDU circuit breakers are in the "standby/off" position. To remove all power, remove ac mains to both PDUs.
NOTEThe voltage selector switch (S1) inside the PDU DOES NOT set the output voltage of the PDU. It sets the PDU’s remote shutdown circuitry for the appropriate input voltage range: 100–127 volts or 200–240 volts.
You must remove the PDU from the bay to wire the Emergency Shutdown wires. The access plate is on the rear of the PDU.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-157
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
Connecting Power to the E1135A/B PDUThe input power connections for each power option for the E1135A/B are shown in Table 10-42.
The Emergency Shutdown main/branch connections between the two PDUs in a 307X support bay are wired at the factory, so no wiring is necessary during installation.
However, if you have multiple 3070 / Series II family systems, and you want the Emergency Shutdown switch on one system to also shut down one or more other systems, some additional wiring is necessary. To implement parallel remote emergency shutdown, all systems must have E1131A or E1135A/B/C PDUs; older PDUs do not have this capability. For wiring instructions, see the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Operating and Service Manual, E1135-90001, section The Branch Control Function.
WARNING
✺Hazardous voltages and currents may exist beneath the covers of the PDU, even when all PDU circuit breakers are in the "standby/off" position. To remove all power, remove ac mains to both PDUs.
Table 10-42 E1135A/B PDU Wiring Diagrams
Power Option Diagram location
220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
Figure 10-76 on page 10-159
208 or 220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0EF, AWW, 05E)200V 2-Phase Open Delta with Phase Center-Tap Neutral (05A)
Figure 10-77 on page 10-160
200–240V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH) Figure 10-78 on page 10-161
220–240V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J) Figure 10-79 on page 10-162
200–240V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC) Figure 10-80 on page 10-163
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-158
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
NOTEThe voltage selector switch (S1) inside the PDU DOES NOT set the output voltage of the PDU. It sets the PDU’s remote shutdown circuitry for the appropriate input voltage range: 100–127 volts or 200–240 volts.
See the E1135C Power Distribution Unit Manual, E1135-90001, for the switch location.
NOTEFor all of the power options set the Voltage Selector switch (S1) on the Control Board to ‘230V’.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-159
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
220/380–240/415 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7)
220/380–240/415 V Single-Phase Wye with Neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
Figure 10-76 220/380–240/415 V 3-phase wye with neutral (0E5, 05L, 0E7), 220/380–240/415 V single-phase wye with neutral (05B, 05G, 05K)
Connect InputLine here
L1
L3L2
N
G
L1 L2
GN
Note: L3 is available only on 3-phase power
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-160
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
208 or 220 V 3-Phase Wye with Neutral (0EF, AWW, 05E)
200V 2-Phase Open Delta with Phase Center-Tap Neutral (05A)
Figure 10-77 208 or 220 V 3-phase wye with neutral (0EF, AWW, 05E), 200V 2-phase open delta with phase center-tap neutral (05A)
Connect InputLine here
L1
L3 L2
G
N
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-161
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
200–240V Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)
Figure 10-78 200–240V single-phase center-tap neutral (AWY, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH)
Connect InputLine here
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-162
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
220–240V Single-Phase Earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)
Figure 10-79 220–240V single-phase earthed (05M, 05F, 05J)
Connect InputLine here
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 10-163
Chapter 10: Site Preparation – Power Requirements for Older Systems: Connecting Mains Power To The System
200–240V Single-Phase Non-Earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)
Figure 10-80 200–240V single-phase non-earthed (AWX, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC)
Connect InputLine here
L1
L2G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-1
11111111 Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion03066-90114 Rev. Z 06/2002
In this Chapter... � Introduction, 11-2
� Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure, 11-4
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-2
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Introduction
Introduction This section contains:
� Introduction, 11-2
� Who Should do the Current Reduction Conversion?, 11-3
� What to Do in Case of Difficulty, 11-3
IntroductionThis chapter provides the information required to reconfigure the power subsystem of an Agilent 3070 Series 3 or 79000 which was shipped prior to June 1999 to have the same power requirements as 3070 / 79000 systems shipped after June 1999. This does not apply to 3070 Series I/II systems.
NOTEThis current reduction conversion procedure is NOT a warranty cost item. MTD does not recognize it as a problem, but it does offer the opportunity for the customer to reduce their current consumption, and the size of their service mains.
NOTEThe current reduction conversion uses the existing hardware. It does not have a product number.
For the serial numbers shown for each system type in Table 11-1, several changes were made which significantly reduced the current requirements. Several power options were also changed. See Facts about PDUs, MPUs and Power Options on page 6-41 for a list of important changes concerning PDUs, MPUs and power options which have occurred with 3070 Series 3 / 79000 products.
Table 11-1 Series 3 / 79000 current requirements reduction serial numbers
System Type 79000 327X 317X 307X
Testhead Product E2190A E9997A E9998A E9900A
Serial Numbers between
US38050109 and US38050101
US38240151 and US38240101
US38240242 and US38240101
US38240239 and US33240101
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-3
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Introduction
The testhead product number and serial number are located on the rear, lower right side on the cross-member of the testhead.
Who Should do the Current Reduction Conversion?This current reduction conversion should only be installed by a 3070 / 79000 service-trained customer engineer (CE). Current reduction reconfiguration requires familiarity the electro-mechanical assemblies in the 3070 / 79000 testheads and xDSL/POTS bay.
WARNING
✺The hardware portion of this upgrade procedure should be performed only by a 3070 service-trained and qualified customer engineer. Voltages capable of causing bodily injury or death are present in the system.
What to Do in Case of DifficultyFor most problems, contact Agilent’s Measurement System Knowledge Center (MSKC). In the U.S. call 1-800-593-6635 with your MSKC support handle. Outside the U.S. call your local Agilent Service Representative to access the MSKC.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-4
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
This section contains:
Current Reduction Conversion Preview, 11-4
Schedule the Conversion, 11-5
Determine the System Type and Power Option, 11-5
Shut Down the System, 11-8
Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage, 11-9
Agilent 6621A and 6624A Line Voltage Settings, 11-9
Agilent 6634A Line Voltage Settings, 11-15
6634B Line Voltage Settings, 11-17
Agilent 6642A Line Voltage Settings, 11-18
Rewire the Inputs to the Outlets, 11-20
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets, 11-29
79000 1-Module System AC Outlets, 11-40
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets, 11-51
307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets, 11-62
307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC Outlets, 11-72
E1085 POTS Bay and E2195 xDSL Bay AC Outlets, 11-79
Reconnect the Loads, 11-84
Verify the System, 11-84
Complete the Conversion, 11-84
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU, 11-84
Current Reduction Conversion Preview1 Schedule the Conversion
2 Determine the System Type and Power Option.
3 Shut Down the System.
4 Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input Voltage.
5 Locate the system type and power option diagram using Table 11-7 on page 11-21. Rewire the Inputs to the Outlets as shown for load balancing.
6 Reconnect the PDU to the Mains. Note that if the existing wiring is larger than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), a pigtail should be used. See the section Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.
NOTEIf a replacement E1135C is being installed and the recommended wire size is greater than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), which is the largest wire size that will easily fit in the E1135C PDU, see the section Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU on page 11-84
7 Reconnect the Loads.
8 Verify the System.
9 Complete the Conversion.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-5
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Schedule the ConversionSchedule with the user approximately 4 hours when the system can be out of service.
Notify the customer that an electrician will need to be available for disconnecting the "mains" and re-wiring the "mains" after the conversion is complete. Schedule with the electrician when a reduced current power drop will be installed, and available for use. This may consist of an SO1 power cord and plug, or in some cases may require the electrician to hard wire the final connection to the system.
Verify that the electrician has the materials to connect a pigtail to the system if the incoming wire size exceeds 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG) and a new power drop is not being installed.
Determine the System Type and Power OptionSee Chapter 6 for full load amps (FLA), wire sizes and breaker sizes.
Determine the system type and power option of this system. On the rear of the 3070 system, on the serial number tag, is the E99XXA common testhead product number (CTPN). The 79000 does not have a CTPN but is identified as a 79000. Refer to Figure 11-1 on page 11-6, to identify the testhead product number which may be used to locate the correct tables in Chapter 6, Site Preparation – Power Requirements and throughout this procedure.
1 SO - Service with Oil-resistant jacket
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-6
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-1 Identifying the merchandising number
Series3+79K.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-7
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
On the rear panel of the E1135C PDU is a panel, shown in Figure 11-2 on page 11-8, which indicates the voltage, number of phases, and full load amps (FLA), also called ARMS, for the PDU as it was originally specified. After completing this procedure, the FLA will be decreased to match the new power requirements.
Using this information, and the power option requirement for your country, determine the power option the PDU is configured for. If you are moving the system to a different location, you may want to reconfigure the system to a different power option.
See Table 10-8 on page 10-84 for the full load amps, wire sizes, and breaker sizes after this procedure is completed. Mark out the old value and add the new value on the ARMS line when the upgrade is complete.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-8
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-2 Identifying the original 3070 power requirements
Shut Down the SystemExecute testhead power off. Shut down the controller.1
Volts AC
ARMS =Full LoadAmperes
Numberof Phases
MainsLabel1.wpg
1 Log in as superuser. Type: shutdown -h 0
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-9
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Power down the system using the PDU on/off switch. Have the electrician disconnect the PDU from the "mains" and use the lock-out, tag out1 procedure to ensure that the power remains off.2
Set the DUT Power Supply’s Input VoltageEach DUT power supply’s input voltage should be set to 220 or 240 volts, as appropriate to the system being converted. Based on the power option of the system, determine the DUT supply line voltage using Table 11-2 on page 11-10 or Table 11-3 on page 11-11. Then proceed with the instructions for the model of DUT power supply you are installing on the pages that follow the table.
NOTEBeginning with the serial numbers shown Table 11-1 on page 11-2, all DUT power supplies in 3070 / 79000 systems are factory configured to 220 or 240 volts. The outlets where the DUT power supplies are connected may also have been modified as described in the following sections, as well as the Repair I Manual, E4000-90160, Chapter 1.
NOTEOption #05A is not available on the Corporate Price List (CPL) after June 1999. The DUT power supplies input voltage for Japanese systems are set to 220 volts at the factory and the neutral center tap is no longer used.
If Three-Phase Delta power (0ED) is not available, use the Single-Phase power option (AWY). 307X single-phase option AWY systems will require two power drops.
Agilent 6621A and 6624A Line Voltage SettingsThe 6621A and 6624A supplies can be set to accept ac input voltage of 100, 120, 220, or 240 volts by positioning the voltage selector card located inside of the line module. Figure 11-3 on page 11-13 shows the location of the power module.
1 A “lock-out, tag-out procedure is used by electricians. The electrician turns the “mains” power switch off and places a hasp through the “mains” power switch. The hasp has holes for pad-locks. A tag is placed on the lock which provides information regarding who put the lock in place, the work being performed, when the lock was installed, when the lock will be removed, and the electrician’s supervisor. Only the electrician who installed the lock or the electrician’s supervisor (under certain circumstances) may remove the lock and turn the “mains” power switch on.
2 In some cases this may mean unplugging the system.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-10
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Table 11-2 DUT power supply line voltage setting (three-phase)
System Power Option
Voltage DUT Supply Line Voltage
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208 220V
05E 127 / 220 220V
0E5 220 / 380 220V
05L 230 / 400 240V
0E7 240 / 415 240V
Three-Phase Delta 0ED 200 220V
05C 220 220V
05H 230 240V
0E6 240 240V
L1
L3L2
N
G
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-11
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Table 11-3 DUT power supply line voltage setting (single-phase)
System Power Option
Voltage DUT Supply Line Voltage
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
AWV 120 / 208 220V
AWZ 127 / 220 220V
05B 220 / 380 220V
05G 230 / 400 240V
05K 240 / 415 240V
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 220V
05F 230 240V
05J 240 240V
L1 L2
GN
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-12
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 220V
0EB 220 220V
0EJ 230 240V
0EC 240 240V
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200 220V
0E3 110 / 220 220V
0EG 115 / 230 240V
0EH 120 / 240 240V
Table 11-3 DUT power supply line voltage setting (single-phase) (continued)
System Power Option
Voltage DUT Supply Line Voltage
L1
L2G
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-13
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-3 6621A and 6624A line input power module location
The procedure for changing the input line voltage is as follows.
1 Remove the power card from the ac input socket on the back of the power supply.
2 To open the power module, move the plastic door on the module aside. If your line voltage change requires a change in rating of the fuse, rotate FUSE PULL to the left and remove the fuse (see Figure 11-4 on page 11-14).
3 Grasp the voltage selector PC board with a pair of needle-nose pliers and slide it out of its slot.
4 To select a voltage, orient the PC board so that the desired voltage appears on the top left side of the board (see Figure 11-4 on page 11-14). Push the board all the way back into its slot.
The desired line voltage must be visible through the module window when the board is installed.
rear662x.wpg
Line input power module
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-14
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-4 6621A and 6624A voltage select PC board
Vol
tage c
hoices
on bo
th sid
es
of pc
board
Voltage Select PC Board
Operating voltage is shown in module window
F1
6628pow.wpg
Line inputpower module
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-15
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
5 Install the correct fuse in the door of the line module if your line voltage change also requires a change in the rating of the fuse (see Table 11-6 on page 11-19).
WARNING
✸Make sure the replacement fuse type (size) and rating (current, speed, and voltage) is consistent with the voltage level you are operating at. Using a substitute fuse could result in a fire hazard.
6 Close the door of the line module and insert the power cord in the ac input socket. Your power supply is now configured to operate at the voltage you selected.
Agilent 6634A Line Voltage SettingsThe 6634A supply can be set to accept 100, 120, 220 or 240 volts ac input. You can convert line voltage by setting three components: two line select switches (S2 and S3) and the rear panel fuse (F1). To convert the supply from one line voltage to another, proceed as follows:
1 Turn off the supply and use a #2 Pozidriv screwdriver to remove the top cover by removing five screws: two M5 on each side and one M4 on the rear panel.
2 Locate the line voltage select switches S2 and S3 (see Figure 11-5 on page 11-16).
Table 11-4 6621A and 6624A fuse requirements
Line Voltage Fuse Needed Part Number
100 / 120 V 8 AF/250V 2110-0342
220 / 240 V 4 AF/250V 2110-0055
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-16
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-5 6634A line voltage selection).
6632ps.wpg
C26
S2
S3U1
T1
U2
U3
TerminalBlock
Line Receptacle
GPIBConnector
Fuse (F1)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-17
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
3 Note that each switch has two positions. Representations of these positions are silkscreened on the PC board next to the switches. To change the line voltage, consult the silkscreen drawing and set the switches accordingly.
4 Check the rating of the fuse (F1) installed in the rear panel fuse holder and replace with the correct fuse if necessary. Use Table 11-5 to determine the proper fuse.
WARNING
✸Make sure the replacement fuse type (size) and rating (current, speed, and voltage) is consistent with the voltage level you are operating at. Using a substitute fuse could result in a fire hazard.
6634B Line Voltage SettingsThe 6634B supply is set at the factory for 120 volt line power. The 6634B supply can be set to accept 100, 120, 220 or 240 volts ac input by setting the jumpers on the power transformer as shown in Figure 11-6 on page 11-18.
1 Turn off power to the supply and disconnect the power cord from the power source.
2 Remove the four screws that secure the two carrying straps and outer cover.
3 Slightly spread the bottom rear of the cover and pull it back to disengage it from the unit.
4 Locate the ac input wiring harness on the left side of the transformer.
5 Use needle nose pliers and connect the ac input wiring harness according to the information in Figure 11-6 on page 11-18.
Table 11-5 6634A fuse requirements
Line Voltage Fuse Needed Part Number
100 / 120 V 4 AF/250V 2110-0055
220 / 240 V 2 AF/250V 2110-0002
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-18
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-6 6634B line voltage selection
Agilent 6642A Line Voltage SettingsThe 6642A supply can be set to accept 100, 120, 220 or 240 volts ac input by setting the line voltage select switches.
1 Turn off power to the supply and disconnect the power cord from the power source.
2 Remove the four screws that secure the two carrying straps and outer cover.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-19
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
3 Slightly spread the bottom rear of the cover and pull it back to disengage it from the front panel.
4 Slide the dust cover back far enough to expose the select switches (see Figure 11-7 on page 11-19).
Figure 11-7 6642A line voltage selection
5 Move the line voltage select switches to the positions corresponding to the desired line voltage.
6 Replace the top cover and secure the carrying straps.
7 Change the line fuse (on the rear panel) to the proper value for the new line voltage (see Table 11-6).
AC line voltageswitch settings
Table 11-6 6642A Fuse Requirements
Line Voltage Fuse Needed Part Number
100 V 6 AF/250V 2110-0056
120 V 5 AF/250V 2110-0010
220 / 230 / 340 V 3 AF/250V 2110-0003
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-20
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
WARNING
✸Make sure the replacement fuse type (size) and rating (current, speed, and voltage) is consistent with the voltage level you are operating at. Using a substitute fuse could result in a fire hazard.
Rewire the Inputs to the OutletsTo wire the ac outlets in your system, start by finding the appropriate information as described below. If the power option you are looking for is not present in the table, it means that that option is not supported in that configuration:
1 Find the section in Table 11-7 on page 11-21 or Table 11-8 on page 11-24 that describes your system configuration: the number of modules, location of outlets, and number of PDUs, as well as the figure page number which describes your power option wiring:
2 Do NOT plug in the instruments, fans, etc. to the outlets at this time. This will be done after the voltages connected to the outlets are tested. Use the tables to verify the voltage from outlets or that devices are plugged into the correct outlets.
NOTEOption #05A is not available on the Corporate Price List (CPL) after June 1999. The DUT power supplies input voltage for Japanese systems are set to 220 volts at the factory and the neutral center tap is no longer used.
If Three-Phase Delta power (0ED) is not available, use the Single-Phase power option (AWY). 307X single-phase option AWY systems will require two power drops.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-21
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Table 11-7 Power option wiring cross-reference (three-phase)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
Outlet Locations 327XFigure 11-8 on page 11-29
79000Figure 11-19 on page 11-40
317XFigure 11-30 on page 11-51
307XFigure 11-41 on page 11-62
Support Bay Outlet Location1-PDU: Figure 11-41 on page 11-622-PDU: Figure 11-51 on page 11-72
Telecom Bays E1085A POTS or E2195A xDSLFigure 11-58 on page 11-80
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-22
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
3-Phase Wye w/ Neutral AWW 120 / 208 - 3 Figure 11-9 on page 11-30
Figure 11-20 on page 11-41
Figure 11-31 on page 11-52
Figure 11-42 on page 11-63, Figure 11-44 on page 11-65
with testhead AWV Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
05E 127 / 220 - 3 Figure 11-9 on page 11-30
Figure 11-20 on page 11-41
Figure 11-31 on page 11-52
Figure 11-42 on page 11-63, Figure 11-44 on page 11-65
with testhead AWZ Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0E5 220 / 380 - 3 Figure 11-11 on page 11-32
Figure 11-22 on page 11-43
Figure 11-33 on page 11-54
Figure 11-45 on page 11-66, Figure 11-47 on page 11-68
with testhead 05M Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
05L 230 / 400 - 3 Figure 11-11 on page 11-32
Figure 11-22 on page 11-43
Figure 11-33 on page 11-54
Figure 11-45 on page 11-66, Figure 11-47 on page 11-68
with testhead 05F Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
0E7 240 / 415 - 3 Figure 11-11 on page 11-32
Figure 11-22 on page 11-43
Figure 11-33 on page 11-54
Figure 11-45 on page 11-66, Figure 11-47 on page 11-68
with testhead 05J Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
Table 11-7 Power option wiring cross-reference (three-phase) (continued)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
L1
L3L2
N
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-23
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Three-Phase Delta 0ED 200 - 3 Figure 11-9 on page 11-30
Figure 11-20 on page 11-41
Figure 11-31 on page 11-52
Figure 11-42 on page 11-63, Figure 11-44 on page 11-65
with testhead AWY Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
05C 220 - 3 Figure 11-9 on page 11-30
Figure 11-20 on page 11-41
Figure 11-31 on page 11-52
Figure 11-42 on page 11-63, Figure 11-44 on page 11-65
with testhead 0E3 Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
05H 230 - 3 Figure 11-9 on page 11-30
Figure 11-20 on page 11-41
Figure 11-31 on page 11-52
Figure 11-42 on page 11-63, Figure 11-44 on page 11-65
with testhead 0EG Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
0E6 240 - 3 Figure 11-9 on page 11-30
Figure 11-20 on page 11-41
Figure 11-31 on page 11-52
Figure 11-42 on page 11-63, Figure 11-44 on page 11-65
with testhead 0EH Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
Table 11-7 Power option wiring cross-reference (three-phase) (continued)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
L1
L3 L2
G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-24
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
Outlet Locations 327XFigure 11-8 on page 11-29
79000Figure 11-19 on page 11-40
317XFigure 11-30 on page 11-51
307XFigure 11-41 on page 11-62
Support Bay Outlet Location1-PDU Figure 11-41 on page 11-622-PDU Figure 11-51 on page 11-72
Telecom Bays E1085A POTS or E2195A xDSLFigure 11-58 on page 11-80
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-25
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Single-Phase Wye w/ Neutral
AWV 120 / 208 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-54 on page 11-75
AWV Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
AWZ 127 / 220 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-54 on page 11-75
AWZ Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
05B 220 / 380 - 1 Figure 11-15 on page 11-36
Figure 11-26 on page 11-47
Figure 11-37 on page 11-58
Figure 11-48 on page 11-69, Figure 11-50 on page 11-71
with testhead 05M Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
05G 230 / 400 - 1 Figure 11-15 on page 11-36
Figure 11-26 on page 11-47
Figure 11-37 on page 11-58
Figure 11-48 on page 11-69, Figure 11-50 on page 11-71
with testhead 05FFigure 11-61 on page 11-83
05K 240 / 415 - 1 Figure 11-15 on page 11-36
Figure 11-26 on page 11-47
Figure 11-37 on page 11-58
Figure 11-48 on page 11-69, Figure 11-50 on page 11-71
with testhead 05J Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
L1 L2
GN
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-26
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Single-Phase Earthed 05M 220 - 1 Figure 11-17 on page 11-38
Figure 11-28 on page 11-49
Figure 11-39 on page 11-60
Figure 11-55 on page 11-76
Figure 11-57 on page 11-78
Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
05F 230 - 1 Figure 11-17 on page 11-38
Figure 11-28 on page 11-49
Figure 11-39 on page 11-60
Figure 11-55 on page 11-76
Figure 11-57 on page 11-78
Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
05J 240 - 1 Figure 11-17 on page 11-38
Figure 11-28 on page 11-49
Figure 11-39 on page 11-60
Figure 11-55 on page 11-76
Figure 11-57 on page 11-78
Figure 11-61 on page 11-83
Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
L1
NG
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-27
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Outlet locations 327XFigure 11-8 on page 11-29
79000Figure 11-19 on page 11-40
317XFigure 11-30 on page 11-51
307XFigure 11-41 on page 11-62
Support Bay Outlet Location1-PDU Figure 11-41 on page 11-622-PDU Figure 11-51 on page 11-72
Telecom Bays E1085A POTS or E2195A xDSLFigure 11-58 on page 11-80
Single-Phase Non-Earthed
AWX 200 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-54 on page 11-75
AWY Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0EB 220 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
0E3 Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0EJ 230 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
0EG Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0EC 240 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
0EH Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
L1
L2G
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-28
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Single-Phase Center-Tap Neutral
AWY 100 / 200 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0E3 110 / 220 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0EG 115 / 230 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
0EH 120 / 240 - 1 Figure 11-13 on page 11-34
Figure 11-24 on page 11-45
Figure 11-35 on page 11-56
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-52 on page 11-73
Figure 11-60 on page 11-82
Table 11-8 Power option wiring cross-reference (single-phase) (continued)
Power ConfigurationPower Option
L-N Voltage/ L-L Voltage - Phases Testhead
L1
L2G
N
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-29
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
327X 1-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 11-8 327X 1-module system AC outlets
Outlet 2
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 3
Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-30
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-9 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H 0E6
327xLLL.wpg
T1 T2 T3
CHECK COUNTRY CODE FOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-31
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-10 327X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-32
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-11 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
T1 T2 T3
327xLLLN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-33
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-12 327X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-34
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-13 327X AWX, AWY, AWV,AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
T1 T2 T3
327xLL.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-35
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-14 327X AWX, AWY, AWV,AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-36
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-15 327X 05B, 05G, 05K
327xLLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-37
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-16 327X 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-38
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-17 327X 05M, 05F, 05J
327xLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-39
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-18 327X 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-40
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
79000 1-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 11-19 79000 1-Module System
Outlet 2
Testhead (Rear View) E2190_ol.wpg
Outlet 1
Outlet 3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-41
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-20 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
79LLL.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-42
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-21 79000 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-43
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-22 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7
79LLLN.wpgUnswitched(Fused)
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-44
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-23 79000 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-45
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-24 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
T1 T2 T3
79KLL.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-46
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-25 79000 AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-47
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-26 79000 05B, 05G, 05K
79KLLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-48
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-27 79000 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-49
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-28 79000 05M, 05F, 05J
79KLN.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-50
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-29 79000 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-51
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
317X 2-Module System AC Outlets
Figure 11-30 317X 2-module system
Outlet 0
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-52
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-31 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
317xLLL.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-53
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-32 317X 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-54
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-33 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
317xLLLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-55
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-34 317X 0E5, 05L, 0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-56
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-35 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
317xLL.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-57
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-36 317X AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0EJ, 0EC, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-58
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-37 317X 05B, 05G, 05K
317xLLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-59
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-38 317X 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-60
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-39 317X 05M, 05F, 05J
317xLN.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-61
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-40 317X 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-62
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
307X 4-Module 1-PDU System AC Outlets
Figure 11-41 307X 4-module 1-PDU system
Outlet 0
Support Bay(Rear View)
Testhead (Rear View)
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-63
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-42 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H,0E6
3070LLL_1.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-64
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-43 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H,0E6
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-65
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-44 3070 1-PDU 0ED, AWW, 05E, 05C, 05H, 0E6
3070LLL_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-66
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-45 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L,0E7
3070LLLN_1.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-67
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-46 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L,0E7
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-68
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-47 3070 1-PDU 0E5, 05L, 0E7
3070LLLN_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-69
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-48 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K
3070LLN_1.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-70
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-49 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-71
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-50 3070 1-PDU 05B, 05G, 05K
3070LLN_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-72
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
307X 4-Module 2-PDU System AC OutletsBeginning with the release of Series 3, with 4-module 2-PDU systems, the DUT power supplies are connected directly to the E1135C PDU, and there are no outlet boxes in the support bay, as shown in Figure 11-51.
Since each of these options are single-phase, which outlet a DUT power supply connects to does not affect the load balance, but knowing where each power supply is plugged in helps when servicing the system.
Figure 11-51 307X 4-module 2-PDU system
Outlet 0
Support Bay(Rear View)
Testhead (Rear View)PDU
Branch
Main
Outlet 2
Outlet 3Outlet 1
5678
To Gnd
1234
To Gnd
See Table
See Table
See Table
See Table
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-73
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-52 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ,0EG, 0EC, 0EH
3070LL_1.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-74
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-53 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ,0EG, 0EC, 0EH
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-75
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-54 3070 2-PDU AWX, AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0EB, 0E3, 0EJ, 0EG, 0EC, 0EH
3070LL_2.wpg
T1 T2 T3
CHECK COUNTRY CODEFOR FREQUENCY
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-76
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-55 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J
3070LN_1.wpg
T1 T2 T3
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-77
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-56 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-78
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-57 3070 2-PDU 05M, 05F, 05J
T1 T2 T3
3070LN_2.wpg
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-79
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
E1085 POTS Bay and E2195 xDSL Bay AC OutletsWhen the E1135C was introduced, the wiring of the E1085A POTS bay was modified by plugging the instruments in the POTS bay, except the Kikusui power supply, directly into the PDU. See the Telecom Theory and Repair Manual, Chapter 4, for additional information.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-80
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-58 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL Bay with E1135C PDU
Outlet 1 -
LineFilter
PDU
MainsInput
5678
To Gnd
1234
To Gnd
See Table
See Table
See Table
See Table
Customer Instruments
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-81
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-59 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL AWW, 05E
E1085-E2195LLLN.wpg
120/127 Volt Externa l Instruments
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-82
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-60 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL AWY, AWV, AWZ, 0E3, 0EG, 0EH
E1085-E2195LLN.wpg
100/127 Volt External Instruments
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-83
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion ProcedureFigure 11-61 E1085A POTS / E2195A xDSL 05M, 05F, 05J
E1085-E2195LN.wpg
220/240 Volt External Instruments
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-84
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Reconnect the PDU to the MainsAfter the outlets are connected to the PDU(s) per the appropriate load balancing diagram, have the electrician re-connect the PDU to the mains. Refer to Chapter 6 to determine the appropriate wire size and breaker size. If the mains supply is larger than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), see the section Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDU.
After the PDU has been connected to the mains and powered, measure that the outlets match the voltage shown in the appropriate diagram. If they do NOT match, fix the wiring error before proceeding to the next step and retest to verify that the power to each outlet is correct.
Reconnect the LoadsAfter turning off the PDU On/Off switch, using the appropriate wiring diagram, reconnect the loads as indicated. This will provide correct load balancing on each phase. Be sure to plug in the DUT power supplies, STC power supplies, fan power and all other connections in the outlets designated for that purpose.
Verify the SystemUse full diagnostics to verify that the system is functional. See the Repair I Manual, Chapter 2 for more information about diagnostics.
Complete the ConversionAfter verifying that the 3070 / 79000 and xDSL/POTS bay passes diagnostics, complete the conversion:
1 Route the cables neatly and secure them using cable ties where strain relief will be helpful.
2 Replace the covers on both the 3070 / 79000 testhead and xDSL/POTS bay.
3 Cross out the old FLA value on the back of the E1135C and write in the new FLA value from the appropriate table in Chapter 6.
NOTEThis current reduction conversion procedure is NOT a warranty cost item. MTD does not recognize it as a problem, but it does offer the opportunity for the customer to reduce their power consumption.
Connecting a Pigtail to the E1135C PDUThe E1135C PDU is the replacement for the E1131A, and E1135A/B PDUs. The input terminals on the E1135C on the mains disconnect switch easily fit wire size 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG). It is strongly suggested that if the recommended wire size is greater than 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG), that short power cord, 450 millimeters (18-inches) to 609 millimeters (24-inches), called a pigtail be created using 10 square millimeters (#8 AWG) wire, and the recommended larger wire size cable be connected to the receptacle which connects to the pigtail, as shown in Figure 11-62.
© Agilent Technologies 1989–2002 Agilent 3070 / 79000 Site Preparation 11-85
Chapter 11: Site Preparation – Series 3 / 79000 Current Reduction Conversion: Series 3 Current Reduction Conversion Procedure
Figure 11-62 Using a pigtail with the E1135C PDU
3070 System
Pigtail.wp g
PD U
AC Source Voltage
Added Pow er Receptac le on a short pigtail if theE1135C PD U is used and the existing conductorsize of the power drop exceeds 102 mm (#8 AWG).
PowerReceptac le
Pigtail
CircuitBreakeror Fuses
Printed in USA06/2002
03066-90114 Rev. Z